Metasys® System Ul® 864 Uukl Ninth Edition Smoke

Metasys® System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke
Control System
Code No. LIT-12011252
Technical Bulletin Issued August 7, 2008
Supersedes May 2, 2007
Document Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Related Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SCT Tool and the LCT Standard Applications Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Smoke Control Software and Firmware Version Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Smoke Control Labeling - Factory and Production Date Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Smoke Control Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Eighth Edition and Ninth Edition Coexistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
FSCS (Fire Fighters Smoke Control Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

FSCS Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
FSCS Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NAE Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Metasys® System Smoke Control System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Smoke Control Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Overview of HVAC Smoke Control System Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Central Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Dedicated Smoke Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Individual Floor Fan Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fan Coil Units/Water Source Heat Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Induction Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Smoke Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Smoke Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Smoke Control Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Metasys® System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System 1
Technical Bulletin
Initiating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Manual Initiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Automatic Initiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
End-to-End Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fan Relay Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Response Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Communication Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Automatic Fan Command Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Manual Fan Command Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Weekly Dedicated Fan Test Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Damper Command Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Manual Damper Command Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Weekly Dedicated Damper Test Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Network Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fire Alarm Annunciation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

IFC2-640 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IFC2-3030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IFC-320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Surge Protection Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Ethernet Transient Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tripp Lite 8 Ultra Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
UL Label Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tripp Lite ISOBAR 12 Ultra Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Network Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Copper Cable Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2 Metasys® System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System Technical Bulletin
Fiber-Optic Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ST Style Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MTRJ Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
NU-RJ45SW1-0U 24 Port Ethernet Switch with RJ45 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5 Port Ethernet Copper Switch with RJ45 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Media Convertors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
NU-MC101-0U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
NU-MC102-0U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Smoke Control Network Automation Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Standard NAE Features and Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Smoke Control NAEs MS-NAE5510-1U and MS-NAE5520-1U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Device Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Powering On the NAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Disconnecting Power from the NAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Device Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Metasys® System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System Technical Bulletin 3
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Device Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Wiring Considerations and Guidelines for Network Integrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
MS/TP Field Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
MS/TP Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

FC Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SA Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Setting a Device Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations . . . . . . . . . 90
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
MOV Requirements for MS/TP I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
End-of-Line Termination Switch Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

FC and SA Bus Device EOL Switch Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
EOL Termination on the FC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
EOL Termination on the SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
SA Buses with Multiple Network Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Terminating FC Devices that do not have Integral EOL Termination Capability . . . . . . . . 101
FC Bus Rules when using TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices 106
FC Bus Rules and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
SA Bus Rules and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Wiring the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
General MS/TP Bus Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
FC Bus Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
FC Bus and SA Bus Screw Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Grounding the Cable Shield on MS/TP Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SA Bus 6-Pin RJ-Style Modular Jack and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Commissioning Devices on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
NU-RPT101-0U RS-485-to-RS-485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Setting EOL for the Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
UL Label Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Tranzorbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
MS/TP Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

FEU16x0 and FEU26x0 Field Equipment Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Common FEC Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Setup and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IOMx710 Field Equipment Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Common IOM Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Wiring the IOM1710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wiring the IOM2710 and IOM3710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Wiring the IOM4710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
IOMx710-0U Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
VMA16x0 Field Equipment Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Common VMA Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

MS/TP SA Bus Network Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Selection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
LONWORKS® Field Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Network Topologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Bus Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Devices per Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
LONWORKS Network Bus Topology Termination NXM-TERM-FTT-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
SMK-MOVKIT-LON Transient Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

SMK-MOVKIT-LON Requirements for LON Communication Bus Transient Protection . . 173
SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 and SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Requirements for LON I/O

Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
LN Series Programmable VAV Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Selecting Differential Pressure Scales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

NXP-FSC-01U Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
NXP-CPU-01U CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Connecting 24 VAC Power to the NXP-CPU-01U CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Connecting I/O Boards to the NXP-CPU-386-01U CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
NXP-CPU-386-01U CPU Board to I/O Board Ribbon Cable Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
I/O Board Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

NXP-FSC-01U I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
NXP-8UI-01U (8 UI Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
NXP-8DO-01U (8 DO Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
NXP-4DO4AO-01U (4 DO/4 AO Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
i.LON 600 LONWORKS/IP Server Router (72603-U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
NXE-RPT-FTT-U LON Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
NXE-FTT-FTT-U Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Smoke Control System Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
LONWORKS Network Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

System Programming Guidelines for Smoke Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Enclosures and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Wiring the PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Power Distribution Panel and Enclosure (PA0P00010FC0-U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Non-Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Ordering Smoke Control Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Enclosures Requiring a Union Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Ordering and Revision Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

General Smoke Control Ordering Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Selection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Smoke Control UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Compliance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Related Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control Compliance Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

General UUKL Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
FSCS UUKL Ninth Edition Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Smoke Control Wiring UUKL Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Metasys® System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke
Control System
Technical Bulletin
Document Introduction
This document provides sales representatives, project engineers, application engineers, system
representatives, and system installers with the information necessary to sell, engineer, and install a
Metasys® system smoke control system that complies with the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.®
(UL) requirements for the UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control Listing. To comply with
the Listing, you must follow the requirements and restrictions placed on the Metasys system
components as detailed in this and other Metasys system documentation applying to the UL 864
UUKL Ninth Edition Listing. The restrictions apply to both used and assembled Metasys system
components.
Note: The Intelligent Fire Controller (IFC) fire system or third party fire system is the primary
fire annunciation station. The Johnson Controls® Metasys system smoke control system is
utilized as a secondary fire annunciation station.
This document specifically addresses the Johnson Controls® Metasys system smoke
control system. This document provides information on the Ethernet-based systems,
communication equipment, and MS/TP Bus and LON® Bus controllers necessary to
create a Metasys system smoke control application. Do not confuse this document with the
Metasys System Extended Architecture Smoke Control UL 864 UUKL Eighth Edition
system.
Related Documentation
The Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition smoke control Application Notes are listed in
Table 1.
Table 1: Related Documentation
For Information On Refer To LIT No./Part No.
Single-Story Shopping Mall Smoke Metasys System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth LIT-12011308
Control Edition - Standard Smoke Control
Applications Application Guide
Multi-Story Building Smoke Control
Warehouse Smoke Control
SCT Tool and the LCT Standard Applications Library
The Site Configuration Tool (SCT) is used in all phases of engineering, installation, and commissioning
of NAEs, FC bus devices, and LON devices that make up the Metasys smoke control system. The SCT is
used offline to create archive databases that are downloaded to a smoke control NAE. The Logic
Connector Tool (LCT), contained in the SCT, was used to create the standard smoke control applications
included on the Branch Purchase Package (BPP) CD.
The standard smoke control applications can be installed and executed on any smoke control NAE. Use
the standard smoke control applications as written, any sequence modification to the LCT program must
be pre-approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The SCT tool must not be accessible to
anyone other than designated qualified technicians who are responsible for installing, commissioning,
and maintaining the smoke control site configuration. Password restriction in conjunction with SCT
accessibility will prevent unauthorized editing of the smoke control sequences.
Smoke Control Software and Firmware Version Numbering

Metasys smoke control system software uses the following numbering scheme:
X.x.y
Where:
• X is the major revision
• x is the minor revision
• y is a patch
Example: 3.0.1
Smoke Control Labeling - Factory and Production Date Codes

Johnson Control’s Ninth Edition smoke control products all have a coded label that designates the
factory where the product was produced and its production year and week (LLLYYWW).
Where LLL is the 1 to 3 character factory location code
Where YY is the last 2 digits of the Gregorian Calendar year
Where WW is a 2 digit number corresponding to the week of the current calendar year (01 thru 52)
For example, a part manufactured at the Reynosa factory in the 12th week of 2007 would have a label
code of M0712.
Figure 1: Example Label With Date Code
Factory Location List
Table 2: Factory Location Code Table
Factory Code Factory Location
RY1 Plant 1, Reynosa, Mexico
RY2 Plant 2, Reynosa, Mexico
LKY Louisville, Kentucky
References
When designing your smoke control system, you must read and become familiar with the
following documents, codes, and standards, as applicable:
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 92A Recommended Practice for Smoke Control
Systems
• American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
publication entitled Design of Smoke Control Systems for Buildings
• NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
• NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
• NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
• NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
• NFPA 92B Guide for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Areas
• International Code Council (ICC) which includes:
- Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA) model code
- International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) model code
- Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI) regulations
• UL 864 Ninth Edition Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems
Smoke Control Requirements
Eighth Edition and Ninth Edition Coexistence
The intended combined smoke control system must be approved in writing by the local Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ) prior to the installation of any Ninth Edition equipment.
To maintain the UL smoke control Listing, the following rules for a smoke control system where Eighth
Edition and Ninth Edition smoke control equipment coexist must be followed:
1. The isolation of the Eighth and Ninth Edition smoke control equipment must occur at the ethernet
switch.
2. The Eighth Edition smoke control system is installed and operating as detailed in the Johnson
Controls Metasys System Extended Architecture Smoke Control UL 864 UUKL Eighth Edition
literature.
3. The Ninth Edition smoke control system must be installed and operate as detailed in the Johnson
Controls Ninth Edition smoke control literature.
4. Do not replace an Eighth Edition supervisory controller with a Ninth Edition supervisory controller
in order to expand the Eighth Edition smoke control system. Eighth Edition smoke control systems
must remain N2 field bus only and Ninth Edition smoke control systems must only be MS/TP and/or
LON field bus.
5. If an Eighth Edition supervisory controller requires replacement, it must only be replaced with an
Eighth Edition smoke control replacement part (Ninth Edition supervisory controllers are not
allowed as Eight Edition replacement parts).
6. The operation of the smoke control applications must have continuity between the two systems -
floor above/floor below / etc. smoke control applications must be programmed to allow smoke
control between all floors as if a single system were controlling the building.
Figure 2 shows coexisting Eighth Edition and Ninth Edition Smoke Control Systems with devices
that are supported by each Edition.
Figure 2: Coexisting Eighth Edition and Ninth Edition Smoke Control System Details
FSCS (Fire Fighters Smoke Control Station)
FSCS Guidelines
Follow these guidelines:
• Use a UL 864 UUKL Listed FSCS to provide manual control of smoke control systems. You must
use the UL Listed annunciator panel made by Automation Displays, Inc. See the FSCS Requirements
on page 18 for ADI contact information.
• Provide positive indication of operation on the FSCS for all smoke control equipment, for example,
the damper reaches its intended position.
• Configure each Binary Output (BO) object used for pressurization and exhaust control outputs with
positive feedback. Positive feedback monitors the associated controlled equipment status. Typically,
smoke control dampers provide a pair of feedback binary inputs for the two damper end switches,
full open and full closed. For smoke control fans, provide positive indication of air flow with either a
flow switch or pressure differential sensor to determine the intended operating status of the fan.
• Display the status of all smoke control systems on the FSCS.
• Indicate, both visibly and audibly, on the FSCS any trouble conditions, when smoke control
equipment does not respond to automatic or manual commands. The FSCS controls the Sonalert
logic for all smoke control systems, no other application is necessary.
• Prevent the duct smoke detectors from stopping any smoke control fans once the smoke control
system has been activated, if the smoke control strategy is such that the return duct exhausts the
smoke from the building during the smoke control system operation. Duct smoke detectors are often
located in the return duct of a Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) fan and connected
to stop the fan when smoke is detected, which is in compliance with NFPA 90A.
• Use the Weekly Dedicated Test section, located in each of the three Application Notes, on all
dedicated smoke control systems to verify proper operation of Dampers and Pressurization Fans.
Refer to the Single-Story Enclosed Shopping Mall Smoke Control with FSCS Override - Metasys
System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Application Note (LIT-12011067), Multi-Story Building Smoke
Control with FSCS Override- Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Application Note
(LIT-12011068), Warehouse Smoke Control with FSCS Override - Metasys System UL 864 UUKL
Ninth Edition Application Note (LIT-12011069) for more information.
• Automatic activation of any smoke control sequence of operation must have priority over any
automatic environmental control strategy and over any non-smoke control manual commands. When
an automatic smoke control sequence is initiated, the system design must bypass the following
operational overrides:
- High and Low Temperature Protection Devices (specifically, A-11 and A-25 series Temperature
Protection Devices)
- Return and Exhaust Air Duct Smoke Detectors
• Make the indication of a trouble condition from any air duct smoke detector available to FSCS
operators so that they are able to make informed decisions concerning their override actions if smoke
is detected elsewhere, especially in the supply air. This can be in the form of annunciation on the fire
alarm system control panel or a remote annunciator controlled by the fire alarm system.
• Give the highest priority to the FSCS to manually activate or deactivate any predefined smoke
control strategy. Give automatic smoke control a higher priority than any manual or automatic
HVAC application.
• After a smoke alarm is received and acted upon automatically by the smoke control system,
additional smoke alarms must not cause the smoke control system to take automatic
secondary actions. However, the system must execute any manual commands from the FSCS.
• Ensure that all communication links between buildings are fiber-optic cable or copper cable
buried in a conduit that is separate from power wiring.
• Ensure that response time for individual smoke control components to reach their intended
position from the point of command does not exceed the following time periods: 60 seconds
for fan operation at the desired state plus 10 seconds to annunciate; 75 seconds for completion
of damper travel plus 10 seconds to annunciate. In the case of fan start after damper close add
these times. If the damper must be closed before the fan starts, the total response time could be
up to 135 seconds for operation, 75 seconds for damper to close plus 60 seconds for fan to
start. Time to annunciate is added to this time. (Control system response is the time from
automatic detection of a smoke condition to the issuing of the first smoke control command to
the equipment.)
• Automatic activation of any smoke control sequence of operation has priority over any
non-smoke control manual commands and any automatic environmental control strategy,
when an auto smoke control sequence is initiated. High and low temperature protection
devices and return and exhaust air-duct smoke detectors are bypassed.
• Use the UL Listed Smoke Control NAE to interface all input and output smoke control points.
FSCS Requirements
Requirements of an FSCS include the following. The FSCS must have:
• full monitoring and manual control capability over all smoke control systems and equipment
• the capability to override (partially or in full) any operation in progress, including programmed
actions, non-smoke control manual overrides, and non-smoke control bypasses
• the highest priority over all smoke control systems and equipment
• a building diagram clearly indicating the type and location of all smoke control equipment
• indication of the actual status (not the command status) of systems and equipment used for smoke
control. This includes both the full open status and the full closed status of each damper, the status of
each fan used for smoke control, and the air flow status of every fan.
• the ability to activate an audible signal if the operation proof sensor (binary feedback point) failed to
provide positive feedback that its command was executed within the allowed response time
• hardware supervision alarms, such as binary feedback trouble on fans and dampers, as well as the
system trouble points, that will turn on the FSCS alarm horn
• sole control (Use only one FSCS on a Metasys system network used for smoke control applications,
unless multiple FSCSs are approved by the AHJ.)
Note: You must use the approved UL Listed display panel as your FSCS. This panel is available from:
Automation Displays, Inc. (ADI)
3533 N. White Avenue
Eau Claire, WI 54703
(715) 834-9595
The FSCS can be connected to any UL 864 UUKL Listed NAE (MS-NAE5510-1U, MS-5520-1U,
MS-NAE-4510-2U, MS-4520-2U, MS3510-2U, or MS-3520-2U) in the network.
NAE Requirements
Alarm Repository
The smoke control NAE must not overwrite the initial smoke event that initiated the smoke control
sequence. This a required setting for all UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition smoke control NAEs.
Refer to the Required Smoke Control Site Object and Smoke Control NAE Settings section in the
Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Standard Smoke Control Applications Application Note
(LIT-12011308) for details on these settings.
Metasys® System Smoke Control System Overview
Smoke Control Application Examples
To help design a smoke control system, Figure 3 - Figure 5 show examples that comply with
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition listings, incorporating smoke control and non-smoke control
systems. These are examples - the number and arrangement of components in your system may
differ. Ensure that your system complies with all UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition device and
communication requirements and restrictions.
Figure 3: Metasys System Smoke Control System Main Connection Details
See Figure 4 for MS/TP connection details and Figure 5 for LON Bus connection details.
MS-NAE5510-1U
Smoke Control NAE
MS-NAE4510-2U
or
MS-3510-2U
Smoke Control NAE
1
FC Bus Details
FC A
FC A FC B
NOTE: NAE MS-5510-1U (FC Bus A and FC Bus B ports) and

MS-NAE4510-2U or MS-3510-2U (FC Bus A ports) can be configured as:
1. Smoke Control bus only.

2. Smoke Control bus with a Repeater isolated Non-Smoke Control bus.
3. Non-Smoke FC bus or non-smoke N2 bus.
NOTE: 3rd Party Fire System Points may be connected as Dry Contacts
to a digital input on an FEC or IOM.
Smoke Control 55/45/35 NAE
FC Bus
Network
IOM IOM Sensor
SA Bus ...
FEC
Network
IOM Sensor
IOM SA Bus ...
Network
IOM Sensor
SA Bus ...
VMA
SA Bus
FC Bus
FSCS Panel
A - Near Side with FEC1610
NU-RPT101-0 Repeater
SMOKE_WIRE_FC_DETAILS
B - Far Side NOTE: Repeater is utilized to:
FC Bus 1. Extend the physical length of a Smoke Control FC bus.

To either the 2. Isolate the Smoke Control bus from Non-Smoke Control
Extended Smoke Control FC Bus equipment and/or Third-Party equipment on the same FC bus.
or Once isolated from the smoke control bus, no smoke control devices
Non-Smoke Control equipment. can be added to the Far Side bus.
Figure 4: Metasys System Smoke Control System FC Bus Connection Details
MS-NAE5520-1U
Smoke Control NAE
MS-NAE4520-2U
or
MS-3520-2U
2
Smoke Control NAE
LON Bus
LON Bus
iLON 600 IP Router
...
LON Bus LON Bus
Smoke Control 55/45/35 NAE
LON Bus Smoke Control NAE Smoke Control NAE
FSC FSC FSC
VAV VAV VAV
A - Near Side A - Near Side A - Near Side

NXE-RPT-FTT LON Repeater NXE-RPT-FTT NXE-RPT-FTT
LON Repeater LON Repeater
B - Far Side B - Far Side B - Far Side
To To To
Non-Smoke Control Non-Smoke Control Non-Smoke Control
and Third-Party and Third-Party and Third-Party
or or or
Extended Smoke Control Bus Extended Smoke Control Bus Extended Smoke Control Bus
NOTE: Repeater may be utilized to:
1. Extend the physical length of a Smoke Control LON Bus.

2. Isolate the Smoke Control bus from Non-Smoke Control
equipment or Third-Party equipment.
Figure 5: Metasys System Smoke Control System LON Bus Connection Details
Figure 6 shows a third-party Fire Alarm Control Panel used in a smoke control system. You can use any
UL 864 UOJZ Listed FACP manufactured by a third party.
MS/TP LON
Smoke Control NAE 5510-1U Smoke Control NAE 5520-1U
LON LON LON LON

FC FC
FEC IOM
Dry Contacts NXP-FSC-01U NXP-FSC-01U NXP-FSC-01U NXP-FSC-01U

Maximum
20 Foot Length
(Must be in conduit)
3rd_Party_Wire
Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm
Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel
(Third Party) (Third Party) (Third Party) (Third Party) (Third Party) (Third Party)
Figure 6: Fire Alarm Control Panel Inputs

Figure 7 shows a application using fiber-optic cable and media converters. The following guidelines
apply in this system:
• Install all fiber-optic lines and copper cables in conduit.
• Verify that all fiber-optic lines with ST connectors have a maximum length of 2000 meters (6560
feet).
• Verify that connections between a media converter and a Smoke Control supervisory controller have
a maximum length of 6 meters (20 feet) and that all cables are in the same room as the media
converters.
• Verify that all copper cables with RJ45 connectors are Category 5 twisted pair.
Figure 7: Smoke Control System - Fiber-Optic and Ethernet Communications
Overview of HVAC Smoke Control System Types
Central Systems
Central HVAC systems are frequently employed in smoke control designs. The designer should ensure
that the system’s capacity is sufficient to supply the quantity of outdoor air necessary to pressurize the
areas adjacent to any fire area. The designer should also make sure that the fan systems can handle
situations where a fire may expand to other areas, requiring more areas to be positively pressurized. In
addition, the installer must install smoke dampers at the duct risers of each floor’s supply and return
takeoffs as required by NFPA 92A. Pressure controls should also be employed in order to avoid rupturing
or collapsing the ductwork.
Dedicated Smoke Control Systems

Dedicated smoke control systems are fan, damper, and duct systems designed for the sole purpose of
controlling smoke within a building. An example of a dedicated system is a stairwell or elevator shaft
pressurization system that is operational only during a smoke control event. The dedicated smoke control
systems form a system of air movement that is separate and distinct from the building’s HVAC system,
and they only operate to control the flow of smoke. With their function being dedicated to the
performance of smoke control, dedicated smoke control systems are more immune to faults in the
building’s HVAC system.
Note: To assure full performance and maintain UL compliance, apply automatic weekly testing to all
dedicated systems, including dedicated elevator shaft fans, dampers used exclusively for smoke
control. Refer to the Single-Story Enclosed Shopping Mall Smoke Control with FSCS Override -
Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Application Note (LIT-12011067), Multi-Story
Building Smoke Control with FSCS Override- Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition
Application Note (LIT-12011068), Warehouse Smoke Control with FSCS Override - Metasys
System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Application Note (LIT-12011069) for details on how to
perform the necessary tests. Any failure to properly respond in the allotted time must send a
trouble signal to the FSCS.
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control Systems

Non-dedicated smoke control systems share components with other air moving equipment normally
used for building environmental control. When the smoke control mode is activated, the operating mode
of the building’s HVAC equipment changes in order to accomplish the objectives of the smoke control
design. Non-dedicated systems tend to be less costly and occupy less space. However, from an
operational standpoint, the control strategy becomes more elaborate. This may expand the number of
control and monitoring points connected to a Building Automation System (BAS) and increases the
complexity of the sequence of operation of the air moving equipment.
Individual Floor Fan Units

If sufficient outdoor air is available and the system has the capability to exhaust an area, individual or
floor-by-floor fan units can be used in smoke control applications.
Fan Coil Units/Water Source Heat Pumps
These types of units are generally located on the perimeters of buildings and draw only enough
outdoor air to fulfill the fresh air requirements of the spaces they serve. The units are used in
conjunction with central systems, which deliver fresh air and exhaust recirculated air in larger
quantities. When the fan coil unit is not located in the smoke zone, it is acceptable to exclude it
from the smoke control sequence. When the unit serves the smoke zone in a design that calls for
the area to be negatively pressurized, its outdoor air damper should be closed, and the unit should
be de-energized.
Induction Units
During a smoke control mode, induction units that serve the smoke zone should be shut down, or
their primary air source should be closed off.
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems

The Variable Air Volume (VAV) system, when employed as part of a smoke control strategy, is a
subset of the general central system category described above. Employ control strategies that
ensure adequate quantities of air pass through the terminal units to permit floor pressurization in
the areas adjacent to the smoke zone. This may include overriding the air volume control to
provide maximum deliverable air to the areas adjacent to the fire area. If fan-powered terminal
units are used and installed in the smoke zone, shut off their fans. If bypass dampers fulfill the
volume control, close the damper during smoke control mode.
Smoke Dampers
All dampers used as barriers in smoke partitions or as safety dampers in a smoke control system
must be UL Listed and Classified for use in that application. (Refer to UL 555S Standard for
Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.)
Design Considerations
This section outlines the design criteria you should consider when implementing a smoke control
strategy.
Smoke Movement
In general, the movement of smoke will follow the same pattern as the overall air movement
within a building. The major influences on smoke movement includes stack effect, air/smoke
buoyancy, air/smoke expansion, wind, pressure, and the operating HVAC system. In a fire
situation, a combination of these influences usually causes smoke movement.
An accepted way of containing smoke within a compartment or an area is to create pressure
differences across partitions that separate the affected area from the surrounding areas. You can
accomplish this by creating higher pressure in the adjacent space than the pressure which is in the
smoke zone. The pressure differential should be sufficient to overcome the effects of wind
pressure, stack effect, buoyancy of hot gases, and other influences, yet permit doors leading to
emergency exit routes to be opened.
In addition, air flow can minimize the movement of smoke through openings such as doors. For example,
you can pressurize a stairwell, thereby minimizing the migration of smoke into the stairwell. Should one
of the stairwell doors open, the flow of fresh air from the stairwell reduces the movement of smoke into
the affected area.
Note: Treat elevator shafts like stairwells and positively pressurize them to prevent vertical migration of
smoke through the building. You may close inter-floor and inter-area duct work not being used
for active smoke control at the appropriate locations, as detailed. See Table 1 Related
Documentation on page 11 of this document.
Smoke Control Strategies

The smoke alarm initiation of an automatic smoke detection device, such as an area-type smoke detector
located in one of the facility’s smoke zones, generally activates the smoke control system. This activation
may initiate a control strategy for the air moving equipment to create higher pressures in the areas
surrounding the smoke zone than are present in the smoke zone. This may include positively pressurizing
areas adjacent to the smoke zone and/or negatively pressurizing the smoke zone and exhausting air from
the smoke zone. Subsequent smoke alarm conditions in other zones must be prevented from
automatically changing the initial smoke control sequence. Keep in mind the guidelines provided in this
section when planning your smoke control strategy.
Note: Do not use duct type smoke detectors exclusively to activate smoke control, for the following
reasons:
• The dilution of air in the duct system likely results in a slow response time.
• The supply air duct detector, when exposed to outdoor air in the HVAC supply air duct, may report a
false alarm condition.
• The duct system may move smoke from the smoke zone, and this causes the duct detector in the
return/exhaust duct of the non-dedicated fan system to register an alarm condition.
Note: It may be acceptable to use a duct smoke detector if it is not exposed to outdoor air, the duct
detector’s coverage area is equal to the area covered by a spot type area smoke detector (typically
900 square feet or less), and/or the AHJ has approved the application.
Initiating Devices
The following section describes initiating devices for manual and automatic initiation.
Manual Initiation
Do not use manual pull stations to initiate a smoke control sequence, since there is no certainty that
manual devices will be activated in the area of involvement. However, you can use manual pull stations
to initiate global operations, such as energizing stairwell and elevator shaft pressurization fans.
Manual implementation of the smoke control strategy takes place at the FSCS. The FSCS must be
capable of overriding, either partially or in full, any automatic activation that may be in progress. It must
also be capable of manually controlling each control point (damper, HVAC fan, and so forth) that is used
for smoke control in the facility. Refer to the application notes in Related Documentation on page 11 for
details on how to integrate an FSCS into a Metasys system.
Interface devices (those that interface field points to the controller) have the following
restrictions. They must:
• be listed for use in the Johnson Controls Smoke Control Listing
• be used and installed according to Johnson Controls literature
• result in fan operation at the desired state within 60 seconds (plus 10 seconds to annunciate)
when commanded
• result in completion of damper travel within 75 seconds (plus 10 seconds to annunciate) when
commanded
For more information, see the Smoke Control Applications in Table 1 on page 11.
Automatic Initiation
You can initiate an automatic operation of a smoke control sequence using a Multi-State or
Life-Safety BACnet Gateway connected to an IFC2-640, IFC2-3030, or IFC-320 Intelligent Fire
Controller panel. In addition, a third-party Fire Alarm Control Panel can initiate automatic
operation of a smoke control sequence using a set of dry contacts.
Third party devices must be connected to a repeater (NU-RPT101-1U).
End-to-End Verification
End-to-end verification is required to ensure that the smoke control sequence of operation has
been implemented. Verification must be accomplished by using damper position indicators and air
flow switches or differential pressure sensors. Failures resulting in equipment failing to respond
(or responding inappropriately) to commands from the Metasys smoke control system, must
generate an audible and visual trouble signal at the FSCS. For HVAC dampers, used in smoke
control sequences, the FSCS must display a positive indication of the damper’s fully opened
position and its fully closed position and must report a trouble condition if the damper position
does not agree with the commanded position. For a permanent record of trouble conditions,
including situations where the commanded smoke control sequence does not equal condition, use
the audit trail function to record the last commands and events during a Smoke Control Sequence.
Fan Relay Supervision

If the project must meet Life Safety Code NFPA 101 requirements (where the fire system utilizes
the HVAC system to sequence control or shutdown an HVAC fan), then fan relay supervision is
required. The auxiliary relay used to control the motor starter on the HVAC system fan must be
located within three feet of the motor starter. The wiring between the fan shutdown controller and
the shutdown relay must be monitored for integrity (supervised). This can be accomplished by
using electronic supervision or continuously powered shutdown relays that turn the fan off if
power is lost to the relay circuit. In addition, proof of fan operation such as an air flow switch is
required.
Response Times
Response times for individual components to achieve their intended state from the point of command
should not exceed the following time periods: 60 seconds for fan operation at the intended state plus 10
seconds to annunciate; 75 seconds for completion of damper travel plus 10 seconds to annunciate. See
Figure 8 through Figure 14 for examples of response times and timing order.
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Communication Timing
IFC Fire
NAE FSCS
Panel
On Loss of the On Loss of the On Loss of the

communication communication communication
to a Fire Panel to the NAE you to the FSCS
you have 200 have 200 you have 200
seconds to seconds to seconds to
annunciate the annunciate the annunciate the
trouble at the trouble at the Trouble/Alarm
FSCS FSCS at the NAE
Field Fan Controls

Controller
On Loss of the On a trouble for

Communication Loss Timing Sequence.vsd
communication the output /

to the Field feedback
Controller you circuits on the
have 10 Field Controller
seconds to you have 10
annunciate the seconds to
trouble at the annunciate the
FSCS trouble at the
FSCS
NOTE: If the trouble is locked in for 24 hrs, the FSCS must resound the trouble by flashing the
LED for the equipment and sounding the audible alarm on the FSCS again.
Figure 8: UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Communication Timing
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Automatic Fan Command Timing
0 Seconds Smoke Alarm Annunciation – 10 Seconds
IFC Detects 10 Seconds

Alarm and
Annunciates A
at the IFC 10 Seconds 60 Seconds 10 Seconds
Fire Panel 1st Command Field Control Trouble Annunciation
B C D
A
The overall
time for
annunciation
is 10 seconds,
regardless of
Automatic Fan Command Timing
how many
controllers are
in the process
IFC Fire
NAE FSCS
Panel
Annunciation
of a Fire alarm The NAE
The FSCS
from the IFC must process
must indicate
Fire Panel the Alarm and
a Fire Alarm
send a
with a solid
Command to
Zone LED
the FSCS
In Parallel
B D
In Parallel, the The overall C The Fan has
NAE must time for the
60 seconds to
trigger the first Smoke Field The Fan has
Fan Controls change to the
Smoke control Controller 60 seconds to
intended
Control command is change to the
position, if it
Strategy 10 seconds intended
does not you
from the position
have 10 sec
annunciation
to annunciate
of the Fire
a Trouble at
alarm at the
Metasys® System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System Technical Bulletin
the FSCS
FSCS + 10
Seconds = 20
Seconds from
the fire alarm
at the IFC Fire
Panel
NOTE: If the equipment fails to reach its intended position for the test, a Trouble is annunciated
on the FSCS. An Auto Command Retry then occurs every minute until either the equipment has
reached the intended position or the fire condition requiring smoke control on the equipment is
cleared. If the Trouble is locked in for 24 hrs, the FSCS must flash its Trouble LED for the
equipment and resound the FSCS audible alarm.
V9_Automatic_Fan_Cmd
Figure 9: Automatic Fan Command Timing
29
30
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Manual Fan Command Timing
0 Seconds
NAE
10 Seconds 60 Seconds
processes Manual Command Field Control Fan Position Attempt – 60 Seconds
the manual
command
A B
Manual Fan Command Timing
10 Seconds
10 Seconds
NAE FSCS Fan Fails to Reach Intended Position - Trouble Annunciation C
Using the C
FSCS
switches, The Fan had
issue a 60 seconds to
manual Fan change to the
command intended
position, if it
did not you
have 10 sec
to annunciate
a Trouble at
the FSCS
A
The NAE The overall B
must process time for the
the command Smoke control Field The Fan has
from the command is 60 seconds to Fan Controls
Controller
FSCS 10 seconds change to the
for the intended
command position
issued at the
FSCS
V9_Manual_Fan_Cmd
Figure 10: Manual Fan Command Timing

UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Weekly Dedicated Fan Test Timing
0 Seconds
NAE NAE Command Field Control Fan Position Attempt – 60 Seconds
commands
the Weekly A B
Test to begin
10 Seconds
Weekly Dedicated Fan Test Timing
NAE FSCS Damper Fails to Reach Intended Position - Trouble Annunciation C
C
The Fan had
60 seconds to
change to the
intended
position, if it
did not you
have 10 sec
to annunciate
a Trouble at
the FSCS
A
The overall
time for the B
first
Equipment Field The Fan has Fan Controls
Test Controller 60 seconds to
command is change to the
10 seconds intended
from the start position
of the Weekly
Dedicated
Test.
NOTE: If the equipment fails to reach the intended position for the test, a Trouble is annunciated
on the FSCS. An Auto Command Retry then occurs every 10 minutes until the test is completed
satisfactorily. The test is terminated at the first Trouble indicated if either a fire alarm occurs that
includes this equipment, an FSCS Zone Switch is moved from the Auto position that includes this
equipment, or the individual equipment FSCS switch is moved from the Auto position. If the
Trouble is locked in for 24 hrs, the FSCS must flash the LED for the equipment and resound the
audible alarm on the FSCS.
V9_Weekly_Fan_Test
Figure 11: Weekly Dedicated Fan Test Timing
31
32
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Automatic Damper Command Timing
0 Seconds Smoke Alarm Annunciation – 10 Seconds
IFC Detects 10 Seconds

Alarm and
Annunciates A
at the IFC 10 Seconds 75 Seconds 10 Seconds
Fire Panel 1st Command Field Control Trouble Annunciation
B C D
A
The overall
time for
annunciation
is 10 seconds,
regardless of
how many
controllers are
in the process
Automatic Damper Command Timing
IFC Fire
NAE FSCS
Panel
Annunciation
of a Fire alarm The NAE
The FSCS
from the IFC must process
must indicate
Fire Panel the Alarm and
a Fire Alarm
send a
with a solid
Command to
Zone LED
the FSCS
B
C D
In Parallel, the The overall
NAE must time for the The Damper The Damper
trigger the first Smoke Field has 75 Damper has 75
Smoke control Controller seconds to Controls seconds to
Control command is change to the change to the
Strategy 10 seconds intended intended
from the position position, if it
annunciation does not you
of the Fire have 10 sec
alarm at the to annunciate
FSCS + 10 a Trouble at
Seconds = 20 the FSCS
Seconds from
the fire alarm
at the IFC Fire
Panel
V9_Automatic_Damper_Cmd
Figure 12: Automatic Damper Command Timing

UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Manual Damper Command Timing
0 Seconds
NAE
processes 10 Seconds 75 Seconds
Manual Command Field Control Damper Position Attempt – 75 Seconds
the manual
command A B
10 Seconds
Manual Damper Command Timing
10 Seconds
Using the C
FSCS
switches, The Damper
issue a had 75
manual seconds to
Damper change to the
command intended
position, if it
did not you
have 10 sec
to annunciate
a Trouble at
the FSCS
A
The NAE The overall B
must process time for the
the command Smoke control Field The Damper Damper
from the command is Controller has 75 Controls
FSCS 10 seconds seconds to
for the change to the
command intended
issued at the position
FSCS
V9_Manual_Damper_Cmd
Figure 13: Manual Damper Command Timing
33
34
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Weekly Dedicated Damper Test Timing
0 Seconds
NAE NAE Command Field Control Damper Position Attempt – 75 Seconds
commands
the Weekly A B
Test to begin
10 Seconds
Weekly Dedicated Damper Test Timing
C
The Damper
had 75
seconds to
change to the
intended
position, if it
did not you
have 10 sec
to annunciate
a Trouble at
the FSCS
A
The overall B
time for the
first
Field The Damper Damper
Equipment
Controller has 75 Controls
Test
seconds to
command is
change to the
10 seconds
intended
from the start
position
of the Weekly
Dedicated
Test.
NOTE: If the equipment fails to reach the intended position for the test, a Trouble is annunciated
on the FSCS. An Auto Command Retry then occurs every 10 minutes until the test is completed
satisfactorily. The test is terminated at the first Trouble indicated if either a fire alarm occurs that
includes this equipment, an FSCS Zone Switch is moved from the Auto position that includes this
equipment, or the individual equipment FSCS switch is moved from the Auto position. If the
Trouble is locked in for 24 hrs, the FSCS must flash the LED for the equipment and resound the
audible alarm on the FSCS.
V9_Weekly_Damper_Test
V9_Weekly_Damper_Test
Figure 14: Weekly Dedicated Damper Test Timing

Network Communications
See Table 3 for ethernet network rules. Follow the Important information listed below.
Table 3: Ethernet Network Rules
Category Rules/Maximum Allowed
General Star topology with network hubs, switches, and routers
Number of Devices Maximum of 100 devices can be connected to one site in the Metasys system extended
architecture.
Line Length and Type Solid unshielded twisted pair (Category 5 cable): 100 m (330 ft)
Stranded unshielded twisted pair (patch cable): 10 m (33 ft)
RG58A/U coax cable (for 10Base2 systems): 185 m (607 ft)
Plastic/glass fiber optic with external adapter: 2000 m (6600 ft)
Terminations For 10/100 BaseT, no line terminators allowed.
Surge Protection All ethernet connections must have a PNET1GB surge suppressor at each end of its ethernet
cable. The ground lead of the PNET1GB must be connected to earth ground. See APC
PNET1GB Ethernet Transient Protector on page 38 for additional information and wiring
details.
IMPORTANT: Do not apply power to the Metasys network before finishing communication wiring
and checking all wiring connections. Short-circuited or improperly connected wires may result in
permanent damage to the equipment.
IMPORTANT: Use copper conductors only. Make all wiring in accordance with local, national, and
regional regulations. Do not exceed the electrical ratings for the devices on the Metasys network.
IMPORTANT: Do not run network communication cables in the same conduit, raceway, or panel
with any high voltage (>30 VAC) wiring. Isolate all network devices from high-voltage wiring and
equipment. Failure to isolate network wiring and network devices from high-voltage wiring and
equipment can result in damage to network devices or poor network performance.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the network wiring and network devices.
Static electric discharge can damage the network devices and void any warranties.
IMPORTANT: Always consult with the customer’s Network IT department before installing
Metasys Ethernet components. Other online systems may be affected, so close coordination with the
IT department is very important.
IMPORTANT: Do not deform, bend, stretch, or staple Ethernet cables. Also, do not run Ethernet
cables parallel to power cables or near noise inducing components.
WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock and Property Damage. Disconnect or isolate all power
! supplies before making electrical connections. More than one disconnect or isolation may be
required to completely de-energize equipment. Contact with components carrying hazardous
voltage can cause electric shock and may result in severe personal injury or death.
Fire Alarm Annunciation Panels
IFC2-640
The IFC2-640 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel is part of the Fire Alarm Controls. As a
standalone small-to-large system or as a large network, the products meet virtually every application
requirement. Designed with modularity and for ease of system planning, the IFC2-640 can be configured
with just a few devices for small building applications or for a large campus or high-rise application.
Simply add additional peripheral equipment to suit the application.
Figure 15: IFC2-640 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel
IFC2-3030
The IFC2-3030 is an intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel designed for medium- to large-scale facilities.
Fire emergency detection and evacuation are extremely critical to life safety, and the IFC2-3030 is
ideally suited for these applications.
Figure 16: IFC2-3030 Fire Alarm Annunciation Panel
IFC-320
The IFC-320 is designed to bring sophistication and superior performance to smaller applications.
Auto-programming features allow fire protection to be established in seconds. Additional
programming is quick and easy and patented technology makes the IFC-320 exceed worldwide
code requirements for response time.
Figure 17: IFC-320 Fire Alarm Annunciation Panel
Surge Protection Devices
Ethernet Transient Protection
APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient Protector

The PNET1GB provides standalone data-line surge suppression for ethernet networks,
telecommunication and PC system protection.
APC's Surge Protectors are fail safe, which means that once the circuit of an APC Surge Protector has
been compromised the unit disconnects equipment from the power supply ensuring that no damaging
surges reach your equipment.
Figure 18: APC Pnet1Gb Ethernet Transient Protector
See the Wiring section of each ethernet device for proper wiring connections.
Safety Precautions
• Use only for ethernet and token ring interface cards, hubs, switches, and other LAN equipment.
• Turn off power to all equipment to be protected prior to installing the PNET1GB.
• The PNET1GB must be connected to earth ground.
• To prevent electric shock when installing the ground wire to the electrical power outlet ground, turn off
electricity to the outlet.
From the electrical panel, switch off the appropriate circuit breaker or remove the fuse for that
circuit/outlet.
Installation
1. Verify all hardware installation and software configuration prior to installing the PNET1GB.
Verify that the system functions correctly with the existing network line.
2. Switch off power to the equipment to be protected.
3. Disconnect the existing network line from the equipment to be protected.
4. Connect this network line to the input jack o on the PNET1GB.
5. Connect one end of the supplied 6-inch patch cable to the output jack on the PNET1GB. This
jack is labeled on the PNET1GB with a circle and arrow.
6. Connect the other end of the patch cable to the input jack on the network equipment j to be
protected.
7. Connect the green/yellow ground wire to ground.
Note: To fully protect your system, all surge protectors must be properly grounded. If your
electrical system is a two-wire non-grounded system, the PNET1GB may be left ungrounded.
However, if the PNET1GB ground wire is unconnected to earth ground, the longitudinal (line to
ground) surge protection will be rendered ineffective.
Note: An APC PNET1GB is required at both ethernet cable ends of all ethernet connections. It
must be connected as closely as possible to the device. It must be mounted as shown in
Figure 19.
Figure 19: APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient Protector Mounting Details
Specifications
Table 4: APC PNET1GB Specifications
Category Specifications
Peak Current Normal Mode 6.50 kAmps
Peak Surge Current 250A Max with 8 x 20µs waveform
Peak Voltage ±6,000V with 1.2 x 50µs waveform
Breakover Voltage 60 VDC
NM Surge Response Time 1 ns
Dataline protection RJ45 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet protection
Data Lines Protected 1
Let Through Voltage Rating < 60
Nominal Operating Temperature 32 to 120º F (0 to 49º C)
Relative Humidity 10 to 93%, Non-Condensing
Lines Protected Pin #1-8 (on Pin 8 Modular Jack)
Standard Compliance Compliant with IEEE 802.3, 802.5, 802.12 Ethernet
standard, Category 5, 6
Compliance UL 497B
UL 1449 TVSS Rating 330 V
Dimensions (H x W x D) 4.10 x 1.87 x 1.10 in (10.4 x 4.7 x 2.8 cm)
Net Weight 0.11 lbs. (0.05 kg)
UL Label Placement
UL Listing labels must be positioned as shown in Figure 20.
Figure 20: PNET1GB-0U UL Label Placement
Power Surge Protection
The Tripp Lite Isobar Ultra 8 and Ultra 12 premium surge and noise suppression devices prevent
equipment damage and performance problems resulting from damaging transient surges and line
noise. Their active filter network maintains noise-free output with zero reaction / response time.
Rugged all-metal, mountable housing fitted with high quality duplex-style output receptacles. 8
outlets, 2350 joules AC protection level, less than 35V let through voltage, 3 diagnostic LEDs.
Tripp Lite 8 Ultra Surge Suppressor

Robust surge suppression circuits with sine-wave tracking offer extreme levels of protection
against the heaviest surge conditions exceeding IEEE 587 category A & B specifications and
reducing 6,000V test surges to harmless levels under 35 volts. Isobar's unique protection system
combines large torroidal chokes, ferrite rod-core inductors, High Frequency/Very High Frequency
(HF/VHF) capacitors and multiple layers of metal oxide varistors into exclusive isolated filter
banks that remove Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI), even
noise generated by other pieces of connected equipment. ISOBAR8ULTRA offers 8 outlets
arranged in four filter banks to prevent system crashes, reboots and performance problems
common as noisy system peripherals are powered off and on.
Surge suppression rated at 2350 joules / 97,000 amps offers network-grade protection. Widely
spaced NEMA 5-15 outlets accommodate up to 4 large transformer plugs without blocking
outlets. Diagnostic LEDs confirm power availability, line fault and protection status. Includes 12
foot AC line cord with space-saving angled input plug, and keyhole mounting tabs.
Figure 21: Tripp Lite Isobar 8 Ultra Surge Suppressor
Specifications
Table 5: Tripp Lite ISOBAR 8 Ultra Surge Suppressor Specifications
Category Specification
Voltage compatibility 120 VAC
Frequency compatibility 60 Hz
Output volt amp capacity 12 Amps
Output watt capacity 1440 watts
Outlet quantity / type 8 NEMA 5-15R output receptacles, high quality duplex style
Transformer accommodation Supports up to 4 large transformer plug accessories without
covering remaining outlets
Input connection type NEMA 5-15P input plug
Input cord length 12 ft (3.7 m)
Recommended electrical service 120V 15A
Diagnostic LEDs PROTECTION PRESENT (green)
LINE FAULT (red)
LINE OK (green)
Switches Two position red illuminated on/off power switch
Protection modes Includes full normal mode (H-N) and common mode (N-G / H-G)
line surge suppression
AC suppression joule rating 2350 joules
Clamping voltage (RMS) 140V
AC suppression response time NM = 0 ns, CM = <1 ns
AC suppression surge current rating 97,000 amps (36,000 NM / 61,000 CM)
AC suppression components used Metal oxide varistors, toroidal balanced chokes, ferrite rod-core
inductors and VHF capacitors.
Safe thermal fusing Prevents unsafe conditions during extreme extended overvoltages
and catastrophic occurrences
UL1499 let through rating 330V - UL Verified
IEEE587 Cat. A ringwave let through Less than 35 volts
EMI / RFI filtering 40-80 dB
Unit Weight 4.6 lbs (2.1 kg)
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) 2.5 x 9 x 3.5 in (6.4 x 22.9 x 8.9 cm)
Compliance
UL 1449 1998 Rev. (AC Suppression) UL1449 (UR status)
UL 1283 (EMI Filter) UL 1283
cUL / CSA (Canada) cUL
Approvals Exceeds IEEE 587 category A&B specifications
UL Label Placement
UL Listing labels are not required for this product.
Tripp Lite ISOBAR 12 Ultra Surge Suppressor
Tripp Lite's ISOBAR12ULTRA offers network-grade surge and noise suppression in a versatile
all-metal multi-mount cabinet. Detachable mounting flanges are configurable for rackmount,
wallmount and under-counter installation. Uses only 1 rack space (1U) when installed in any 19
inch EIA standard rack. Features the highest level of AC surge and EMI/RFI noise suppression of
all Tripp Lite rackmount surge suppressors. Outlets are arranged in exclusive isolated filter banks
to limit noise interaction among connected items. Includes 12 outlets (2 front / 10 rear), 15 ft AC
power cord and guarded power switch to reduce the risk of accidental shutoff. Diagnostic LEDs
indicate AC present, line fault and protection status.
Figure 22: Tripp Lite Isobar 12 Ultra Surge Suppressor
Specifications
Table 6: Tripp Lite Isobar 12 Ultra Surge Suppressor Specifications
Voltage compatibility 120 VAC
Frequency compatibility 60 Hz
Output volt amp capacity 15 Amps
Output watt capacity 1800 watts
Outlet quantity / type 12 NEMA 5-15R output duplex style receptacles, 2 front / 10 rear
Transformer accommodation Supports up to 4 large transformer plug accessories without
covering remaining outlets
Input connection type NEMA 5-15P input plug
Input cord length 15 ft (4.6 m)
Recommended electrical service 120V 15A
Diagnostic LEDs PROTECTION PRESENT (green)
LINE FAULT (red)
LINE OK (green)
Switches Two-position red illuminated on/off power switch to all outlets
Protection modes Includes full normal mode (H-N) and common mode (N-G / H-G)
line surge suppression
AC suppression joule rating 1280 joules
Clamping voltage (RMS) 140V
AC suppression response time NM = 0 ns, CM = <1 ns
AC suppression surge current rating 96,000 amps
AC suppression components used Metal oxide varistors, toroidal balanced chokes, and VHF
capacitors.
Safe thermal fusing Prevents unsafe conditions during extreme extended overvoltages
and catastrophic occurrences
UL1499 let through rating 330V - UL Verified
EMI / RFI filtering 40-80 dB
Unit Weight 4.6 lbs (2.1 kg)
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) 2.5 x 9 x 3.5 in (6.4 x 22.9 x 8.9 cm)
Compliance UL1449 (UR status)
UL 1449 1998 Rev. (AC Suppression)
cUL / CSA (Canada) cUL
Approvals Exceeds IEEE 587 category A&B specifications
UL Label Placement
Copper Cable Connections
Use copper cables (10BaseT, Twisted Pair) with 4-pair RJ45 connectors for connections between
RJ45 ports on switches, media converters, and Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs). Use
cables less than 100 meters (328 feet) in length. Straight-through cables are used for all ethernet
connections but one.
Use copper cable that has the following characteristics:
• 10BaseT, Unshielded Twisted Pair
• 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) minimum distance between nodes
• 100 meters (330 feet) maximum length
• RJ45 connectors
Verify that copper cable connected to media converters does not leave the room in which the
media converter is installed. Use an American Power Conversion (APC) ProtectNet (Model
PNET1GB) surge protector on each cable segment to prevent electrical surges.
Note: See Figure 19 on page 39 for ethernet surge protection details using the PNET1GB.
RJ45 Female Port on Device
Step 1. Align plug on cable with port on device.
Step 2. Insert plug into port.
Step 3. Push forward slightly to lock into place.
Figure 23: Using RJ45 Style Connectors on Copper Cables
Figure 24: Ethernet Straight-Thru Cable RJ45 Connector Pinouts
Figure 25: Ethernet Cross-Over Cable RJ45 Connector Pinouts
Fiber-Optic Cable Connections

Use fiber-optic cable that has the following characteristics:
• 10BaseFL
• plastic optical fibers
• multimode
• 6560 feet (2000 meters) maximum length
• ST-style connectors (820nm wavelength) or MTRJ-style connectors (1300 nm wavelength)
ST Style Connectors
Step 1: Line up the peg on the cable Step 2: Twist the collar on the cable
with the slot on the connector. to line up with the peg on the
connector.
Twist
Collar
Peg
Twist
Step 3: Push forward and twist
to lock in place.
Push
Figure 26: Using ST-Style Connectors on Fiber-Optic Lines
MTRJ Connectors
MTRJ-Style Port
on Device for
Multimode Fiber-Optic Lines
MTRJ-style Connector for

Multimode Fiber-Optic Lines
Step 1. Align plug on cable with port on device.
Step 2. Insert plug into port.
Step 3. Push forward slightly to lock into place.
Figure 27: Using MTRJ-Style Connectors on Fiber-Optic
NU-RJ45SW1-0U 24 Port Ethernet Switch with RJ45 Connectors
The 24 ports on the NU-RJ45SW1-0U Copper Switch with RJ45 Connectors are
10/100 Mbps and automatically detect which communication speed is used, allowing any of the ports to
be used for 100 Mbps uplink. It also automatically detects whether the communication is half-duplex or
full-duplex.
Figure 28: NU-RJ45SW1-0U Copper Switch
Specifications
Table 7: 24 Port Ethernet Copper Switch Specifications
Fast Ethernet 24 x 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet ports with Auto-Uplink: RJ-45 shielded
connectors
Configuration IEEE Auto Negotiation (sets 10/100 Mbps speed and half/full duplex)
Status Indicators System: Power
Per Port: 2 LEDs. Link (solid)/activity (blink). 100 Mbps (on)/10 Mbps (off)
Efficiency Non-blocking, Fast Ethernet switching
Switch Architecture Triple-chip design with on-board frame buffers
Error Detection Frames with errors (malformed PHY, runt < 64 bytes, CRC error, long > 1536)
are discarded
Forwarding MAC Table 4K addresses
On-Chip Buffer 768 KB (total)
Weight 4.0 lbs (1.8 Kg)
Power 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.33A Max.
Operating Temperature 32 to 120º F (0º to 49º C)
Relative Humidity 10 to 93%, non-condensing
Standards Compliance IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet over 2 pairs of UTP Category 5 (100BaseTX) IEEE
802.3 Ethernet over 2 pairs of UTP Category 3 (10BaseT)
Emissions Compliance FCC Class A
Compliance UL, cUL, CE Safety
UL Label Placement
Figure 29: UL Label Placement for the Asante Ethernet Switch
5 Port Ethernet Copper Switch with RJ45 Connectors
The 5 ports on the FS105 Copper Switch with RJ45 Connectors are 10/100 Mbps and automatically
detect which communication speed is used, allowing any of the ports to be used for 100 Mbps uplink. It
also automatically detects whether the communication is half-duplex or full duplex.
Figure 30: 5 Port Copper Switch
Wiring
Copper Cables
See Copper Cable Connections on page 45 for details on ethernet copper connections.
Specifications
Table 8: 5 Port Ethernet Copper Switch Electrical Specifications
Network Ports Five auto speed-sensing UTP ports
Fast Ethernet 24 x 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet ports with Auto-Uplink: RJ-45 shielded connectors
Configuration IEEE Auto Negotiation (sets 10/100 Mbps speed and half/full duplex)
Status LEDs Link, speed, and activity indicators built into each RJ-45 port
Efficiency Non-blocking, Fast Ethernet switching
Switch Architecture Triple-chip design with on-board frame buffers
Error Detection Frames with errors (malformed PHY, runt < 64 bytes, CRC error, long > 1536) are
discarded
Forwarding Modes Store-and-forward
Buffer Memory 64 KB
Bandwidth 1Gbps
Network Latency Less than 20 µs for 64-byte frames in store-and-forward mode for 100 Mbps to 100 Mbps
transmission
Address Database Size 1,000
Addressing 48-bit MAC address
Weight 0.62 lbs (0.28 Kg)
AC Power 7.5W (7.5 VDC, 1A)
Operating Temperature 32 to 120º F (0 to 49º C)
Relative Humidity 10 to 93%RH, non-condensing
Standards Compliance IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
IEEE 802.3x Full-duplex Flow Control
Electromagnetic CE mark, commercial
Emissions Compliance FCC part 15 Class A
EN55 022 (CISPR22), Class A
VCCI Class A
C-Tick
Safety Agency UL listed (UL 1950)/cUL
Compliance IEC950/EN60950
UL Label Placement
Media Convertors
Follow these additional guidelines when installing the media converters:
• Keep copper cables in the same room as media converters. Use Category 5 copper cables with RJ45
connectors. Cables must be 6 meters (20 feet) or less in length.
• Use an AC to DC power adapter to provide power to the media converters. Secure the power adaptors
in a locked enclosure with a UL Listed terminal strip.
NU-MC101-0U
Figure 31: 10 Mbps Media Converter Connectors
Wiring
Ethernet Surge Protection

See Figure 19 on page 39 for information on the PNET1GB ethernet surge suppression.
Copper Cables
See Copper Cable Connections on page 45 for details on Copper connections.
Fiber-Optic Connections
See Fiber-Optic Cable Connections on page 46 for more information on fiber-optic connections.
Specifications
Table 9: NU-MC101-0U Specifications
External Power Supply 120 VAC, 60Hz
Input Supply Voltage 12VDC
Max Current .5A
Power Consumption 6W
Status Indicators Power (PWR) - Indicates power is applied to the converter
Link (LNK) (2) - Indicates a valid receive link exists
Receive (REC) (2) - Indicates converter is receiving valid data
Normal (NML) Indicates product is working in normal mode
On Line Indicates - BNC port is connected to an active 10Base2
segment (MC15 only)
Collision (COL) - Indicates BNC port is sensing a collision signal (MC15
only)
Packet Transmission Characteristics Round Trip Delay - 0.4µ Maximum
Bit Error Rate (BER) <10 -12
Operating Temperature 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)
Relative Humidity 10% to 93% RH, non-condensing
Operating Altitude 0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3,048 m)
Dimensions 4.12 x 3.75 x 1.0 in(10.5 x 9.5 x 2.5cm)
(Width x Depth x Height)
Weight 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg)
EMC Compliance FCC Class A
Safety Compliance UL-Cul, CSA/CSA, NRTL, TUV,CE compliant
UL Label Placement
UL Listing labels must be positioned as shown in the picture below.
Figure 32: UL Label Placement for the NU-MC101-0U Ethernet Media Converter
NU-MC102-0U
Figure 33: 100 Mbps Media Converter Connectors
Wiring
Ethernet Surge Protection

See Figure 19 on page 39 for information on the PNET1GB ethernet surge suppression.
Copper Cables
See for Copper Cable Connections on page 45 details on Copper connections.
Fiber-Optic Connections
See Fiber-Optic Cable Connections on page 46 for more information on fiber-optic connections.
Specifications
Table 10: NU-MC102-0U Specifications
Standards IEEE 802.3 1998 Edition 10BASE-T; 10BASE-FL
Unit Power LED Lit for normal operation
Port Link LEDs Lit LED indicates unit is receiving link pulses from a compliant
device
Port Receive LEDs Flashing or lit LED indicates packets are being received
Power Supplied by chassis
Connectors 1 RJ-45 (10BASE-T: 100 meters);
1 duplex fiber optic
Dimensions 1.0 x 4.7 x 3.0 in (25 x 119 x 76mm)
(Width x Depth x Height)
Shipping Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Compliance UL Listed; C-UL Listed (Canada);
CISPR/EN55022 Class A; FCC Class A; CE Mark
Environment 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C); 10 to 93% humidity, noncondensing
UL Label Placement
UL Listing labels must be positioned as shown in the picture below.
Figure 34: UL Label Placement for the NU-MC102-0 Media Converter
Note: Figure 34 shows the NU-MC102-0U media converter mounted inside the NU-CH101-0U
chassis.
See the manufacturer’s information packaged with each device for more device-specific
information.
Table 11: NU-MC102-0U Fiber Optic Connector Specifications
Connector Fiber Wave Typical Min TX Max TX Sensitivity Max In Link
Type Type length Distance PWR PWR (dBm) PWR Budget
ST Multimode 850nm 2 km -16.0 dBm -10.0 dBm -29.5 dBm -7.2 dBm 13.5 dB
LED
Table 12: Electrical Specifications for Ethernet-to-Fiber Media Convertors

Product Code Product Electrical Specifications
Number
NU-MC101-0U 10 Mpbs Media Converter External power (AC/DC Adapter) 120 VAC, 60 Hz
Power Draw of Converter: 12 VDC, 0.5 A, 6 Watts
NU-MC102-0U 100 Mbps Media Converter Power supplied from NU-CH101-0U
(requires Power Draw: 12 VDC, 3.4 Watts
NU-CH101-0U)
NU-CH101-0U Single Slot Chassis for External Power (AC/DC Adapter) 120 VAC, 60 Hz
NU-MC102-0U and Adapter Output to Chassis: 12 VDC, 0.8A, 9.6 Watts
NU-MC103-0U
Smoke Control Network Automation Engines
Standard NAE Features and Connections
The Smoke Control NAE55, NAE45, and NAE35 models have several common features and
wiring connections.
Power Supply
MS-NAE5510-1U and MS-NAE5520-1U Power Supply

The MS-NAE5510-1U and MS-NAE5520-1U NAEs must be powered from either a
PAN-PWRSP-U or a PAN-96VAXFR-U power supply transformer.
MS-NAE4510-2U, MS-NAE4520-2U, MS-NAE3510-2U, and MS-NAE3520-2U Power

Supply
The MS-NAE4510-2U, MS-NAE4520-2U, MS-NAE3510-2U, and MS-NAE3520-2 NAEs must
be powered from either a PAN-PWRSP-U or a PAN-96VAXFR-U power supply transformer.
Wiring
Power Wiring
Connect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the transformer to the removable 3-terminal plug
as shown in Figure 35. The middle terminal is not used.
NAE35/NAE45/NAE55
Power Terminal Block
24V~
NAE Power
Terminal Block
Plug
NAE_ALL_POWER_PORT
COM
HOT
Wires from
Johnson Controls
24 VAC Class 2
Power Transformer
Brown Wire Orange Wire

(COM) (24 VAC)
Figure 35: 24 VAC Supply Power
The 24 VAC power should be connected to all network devices so transformer phasing is uniform
across the devices. Powering devices with uniform 24 VAC supply power phasing reduces noise,
interference, and ground loop problems. The NAE does not require an earth ground connection.
Disconnecting Power from the NAE

When 24 VAC supply power to an NAE is disconnected or lost, the NAE is non-operational, but
the POWER LED (Figure 55) remains On and the data protection battery continues to power the
NAE for several (1 to 5) minutes while volatile data is backed up in nonvolatile memory. The
RUN LED goes Off when data backup and shutdown are complete.
FC Bus Wiring (MS-NAE5510-1U, MS-NAE4510-2U, and MS-NAE-3510-2U Models Only)
Connect the three FC Bus wires to the removable 4-terminal plug as shown in Figure 36 (labeled FC
Bus).
SHLD
COM
+
-
FC Bus
Terminal
Block
FC Bus
Terminal Block
Plug
NAE_FC_BUS
REF FC- FC+
Figure 36: FC Bus Wiring
If the NAE is connected to an FC Bus, you must set the End-of-Line (EOL) switch to the proper position.
See the Setting the MS-NAE3510-2U’s End-of-Line Switch section in this document.
LON Wiring (MS-NAE5520-1U, MS-NAE4520-2U, and MS-NAE-3520-2U Models Only)

For LONWORKS compatible networks, connect the wires from the LON network trunk to the removable
3-terminal plug as shown in Figure 37. See SMK-MOVKIT-LON Requirements for LON Communication
Bus Transient Protection on page 173 SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 transient protection wiring details.
LON Network
LON
Terminal Block
LON Network
Terminal Block
SHD
Plug
A
NAE_LONPORT
Wires from
LON Network
Trunk
LON Network wires are not polarity sensitive.
Figure 37: LONWORKS Network Terminal

Block and Wiring Connections
Serial Ports
Use the RS232C A and RS232C B serial ports for direct connections using a standard 9-pin
female to 9-pin female Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) to DTE null modem cable.
Use the RS232C A serial port to direct connect to a computer serial port to browse to the NAE or
to connect to a VT100 or a computer with a VT100 emulator and perform diagnostic procedures.
USB Port
The USB port is not to be used for any purpose.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet connection (10 or 100 Mb/s) is an 8-pin RJ-45 network port. Use the Ethernet port to
connect to Internet Protocol (IP) networks.
Note: Transient protection using a PNET1GB transient protector is required at each end of every
ethernet connection. See APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient Protector on page 38 for
more information.
Smoke Control NAEs MS-NAE5510-1U and MS-NAE5520-1U
Use the Smoke Control NAE, MS-NAE5510-1U (MS/TP) or MS-NAE5520-1U (LON), to interface all
input and output smoke control points. The internal modem is not available for smoke control NAEs.
Place the Smoke Control NAE in a locked enclosure..
Figure 38: Smoke Control NAE MS-NAE5510-1U
Device Layout
RS-232-C FC Bus 24 VAC
Serial Ports Terminals Power Terminal
USB
Ports
End-of-Line
(EOL) Switches
RJ-45 8-Pin
LON
Ethernet
Jack
Wall Mount
Data Feet
Protection
Battery
Compartment
System Status
226 mm
Light-Emitting Diodes
(8.9 in.)
(LEDs)
NAE55_MSTP_FRONT
System 96.5 mm
Re-Boot 3.8 in.
Switch
FC Bus
(N2 Trunk,
RS-232-C LONWORKS R FC Bus) 24 VAC
Serial Ports Terminal Terminals Power Terminal
USB
Ports
End-of-Line
(EOL) Switches
RJ-45 8-Pin
LON
Ethernet
SHIELD
LON A
LON B
Jack
Wall Mount
Data Feet
Protection
Battery
Compartment
System Status
226 mm
Light-Emitting Diodes
(8.9 in.)
(LEDs)
NAE55_LON_FRONT
System 96.5 mm
Re-Boot 3.8 in.
Switch
Figure 41: Smoke Control MS-NAE5520-1U
Powering On the NAE
After applying 24 VAC power, the NAE requires up to 5 minutes to start up and become operational. See
the LED Test Sequence at Startup section.
Startup is complete and the NAE is operational when the (green) RUN LED is On steady and the (red)
GEN FAULT LED is Off. See Figure 42 for LED locations.
IMPORTANT: The data protection battery must be installed and charged before
disconnecting the 24 VAC supply power.
The 24 VAC supply power is disconnected from the NAE by removing the terminal block plug from the
power terminal port on the NAE (Figure 35).
When the 24 VAC supply power to the NAE is disconnected or lost, the NAE is nonoperational. The
POWER LED (Figure 42) remains On, and the data protection battery continues to power the NAE for
several (1 to 8) minutes so that the volatile data can be backed up in nonvolatile memory. The POWER
LED goes Off when the data backup is completed.
Troubleshooting
LED Status Indicators

The NAE55 has 11 LEDs to indicate power and communication status. Figure 42 shows the LEDs and
Table 13 describes their meaning.
POWER
ETHERNET
10/LINK
100/LINK
FC A
FC B
N2-B
N2-A
POWER
SERIAL B
SERIAL A
USB B
USBA
-
NC
+
S
REF
-N2
+
S
REF
-N2
+
PEER COM
NAE_LED_STATUS
R E -BOO T
S Y ST EM
RUN
GENL FAULT
BATT FAULT
24 VAC
RUN
PEERCOM
N2B
N2A
100/LINK
10/LINK
ETHERNET
POWER
ETHERNET MODEM
ET SY R NA E
24 VAC
BATT FAULT
GENL FAULT
Figure 42: Front of NAE55 with LED Designations
LED Test Sequence at Startup

During startup, the NAE automatically initiates an LED test to verify the operational status of the LEDs.
Immediately after connecting supply power, the following LED lighting sequence occurs:
1. The PEER COM, RUN, FC A, FC B, and GENL FAULT LEDs turn on, indicating that the Operating
System (OS) is booting up.
2. The PEER COM, RUN, GENL FAULT LEDs, and the FC A and FC B LEDs shut off. The RUN
LED flashes to indicate that the NAE software is loading.
3. The LEDs display the operational status of the NAE. When the RUN LED goes On Steady,
the operating system and Metasys application are running and the NAE is ready.
The total time to start up the NAE depends on the size of the database and can take several
minutes.
System Re-Boot Switch

The System Re-Boot switch (Figure 40 and Figure 41) forces a manual restart of the NAE
processor. All data changes made to the system since the last time the NAE saved data are lost on
restart, including alarm, trend, and audit trail data. Press the System Re-Boot switch only if the
NAE fails to respond and cannot be accessed by any user device. Do not press the System
Re-Boot switch unless you have tried other reasonable means to fix the problem.
Table 13: NAE LEDs Designation, Normal Status, Description, and Other Conditions
LED Normal Descriptions/Other Conditions
POWER (Green) On Steady On Steady = Unit is getting power from either the battery or 24 VAC power.
Also see the 24 VAC LED. Off Steady = Unit is shut down.
ETHERNET (Green) Flicker Flicker = Data is transferring on the Ethernet connection. Ethernet traffic is
general traffic (may not be for the NAE).
Off Steady = No Ethernet traffic, probably indicates a dead Ethernet network or
bad Ethernet connection.
10/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 10 Mb/s.
100/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 100 Mb/s.
FC A (NAE55 only) Flicker On Steady = Controllers are defined to FC A (FC Bus 1 or N2 Trunk 1) in the
(Green) NAE, but none are communicating. (NAE transmitting only)
Flicker = Normal communications; FC A port is transmitting and receiving data.
Flickers are generally in sync with data transmission but should not be used to
indicate specific transmission times.
Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC A (FC Bus 1 or N2 Trunk 1)
in the NAE.
FC B (NAE55 only) Flicker On Steady = Controllers are defined to FC B (FC Bus 2 or N2 Trunk 2) in the
(Green) NAE, but none are communicating. (NAE transmitting only)
Flicker = Normal communications; FC B port is transmitting and receiving data.
Flickers are generally in sync with data transmission but should not be used to
indicate specific transmission times.
Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC B (FC Bus 2 or N2 Trunk 2)
in the NAE.
PEER COMM (Green) Varies (see Flicker = Data traffic between NAE devices. For an NAE that is not a Site
next column) Director, this LED indicates regular heartbeat communications with the Site
Director. For a Site Director NAE, flashes are more frequent and indicate
heartbeat communications from all other NAE devices on the site. For a single
NAE on a network without an Application and Data Server (ADS), there is no
flicker.
Run (Green) On Steady On Steady = NAE software is running.
On 1 second, Off 1 second = NAE software is in startup mode.
On 0.5 seconds, Off 0.5 seconds = NAE software is shutting down.
Off Steady = Operating system is shutting down or software is not running.
24 VAC (Green) On Steady On Steady = 24 VAC power is present.
Off Steady = Loss of 24 VAC power. In the Off Steady condition, the NAE can
be running on battery power. Also see the POWER LED.
BATT FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = Battery fault. Replace the battery. Battery not connected or
cannot be charged. The BATT FAULT LED may remain On for up to 24 hours
after initially powering-on the NAE. If the BATT FAULT LED remains on longer
than 48 hours after initially powering-on the NAE, check the battery connection
or replace the battery.
GENL FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = General Fault. Fault conditions are user configurable in software.
Preconfigured fault conditions include excessive Central Processing Unit
(CPU), flash or memory use, excessive CPU or Printed Wire Board (PWB)
temperature, or Battery Fault. In normal operation, the GENL FAULT LED
stays on steady for the first half of the startup sequence.
Specifications
Table 14: Smoke Control NAE55x0-1U Technical Specifications
Power Requirement Dedicated nominal 24 VAC
Power Consumption 50 VA maximum
Installation Environment Indoor, Dry
Ambient Operating 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C)
Conditions 10 to 93% RH, non-condensing
Data Protection Battery Supports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable NiMH battery: 12V, 1.2 Ah, with a
typical life of 3 to 5 years at 70° F (21° C);
Product Code Number: MS-BAT1010-0
Clock Battery Maintains real-time clock through a power failure. On board cell; typical life 10 years at
70°F (21°C)
Processor 300 MHz Pentium® class Geode® GX1 MMX enhanced processor
Memory 256 MB Flash nonvolatile memory for operating system, configuration data, and operations
data storage and backup.
256 MB Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM) for operations data
dynamic memory for all models
Operating System Microsoft Windows XP embedded
Network and Serial Two optically isolated RS-485 BACnet MS/TP ports; (9,600, 19.2K, 38.4K, or 76.8K baud);
Interfaces pluggable and keyed 4-position terminal blocks
Two RS-232-C serial ports with standard 9-pin sub-D connectors that support all standard
baud rates
Two USB serial ports, standard USB connectors
One LONWORKS port; FTT10 78 Kbps; pluggable, keyed 3-position terminal block
(LONWORKS port available on NAE5520-1U models only).
Maximum Object Count 5,000 objects
Alarm Repository Size 1,000 alarms
Housing Plastic housing
Plastic material: ABS + polycarbonate UL94-5VB
Protection: IP20 (IEC 60529) Mounting On flat surface with screws on three mounting feet
or single DIN rail
Mounting On flat surface with screws on three mounting screws or single DIN rail
Compliance United UL Listed, File S4977, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
States FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
UL Listed, File S4977, CCN UUKL, UL 864, Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm
Systems
Canada UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003
Europe CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61000-6-3 (2001) Generic
Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry and EN 61000-6-2 (2001) Generic
Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment
Australia C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
and New
Zeland
Dimensions 226 x 332 x 96.5 mm. (8.9 x 13.1 x 3.8 in.)
(Height x Width x Depth) Minimum space for mounting 303 x 408 x 148 mm. (12.0 x 16.1 x 5.8 in.)
Shipping Weight 2.9 kg (6.4 lb.)
UL Label Placement
UL Listing labels must be positioned as shown in Figure 43 and Figure 44.
Figure 43: UL Label Placement for the MS-NAE5510-1U (Front and Bottom View)
Figure 44: UL Label Placement for the MS-NAE5520-1U (Front and Bottom View)
Use the Smoke Control NAEs, MS-NAE4510-2U (MS/TP) or MS-NAE4520-2U (LON), to interface all
input and output smoke control points. The internal modem is not available on the smoke control NAE.
Place the Smoke Control NAE in a locked enclosure.
Device Layout
See Figure 47 (MS/TP) and Figure 48 (LON) for the location of the power supply terminal,
network terminals, Universal Serial Bus (USB) port, and Ethernet port on the NAE.
Field Controller (FC) Bus Jack and Service Port (NAE4510 Models Only)
The NAE is designed to control one field controller MS/TP FC Bus trunk. The RJ-11, 6-Pin jack
labeled FC BUS (Figure 47) is an FC bus service port.
110
4.3 Mounting Data Protection Battery 24 VAC
Clip Compartment Power Terminal
270
10.6
62
2.5
131
5.2 RJ-11 6-Pin
Field Controller
ET SY R
Service Port
210
8.3
NAE45_FRONT_DIMS
USB
RJ-11 6-Pin Mounting Port End-of-Line FC Bus
System Status Modem Clip RJ-45 8-Pin
Port RS-232 Mounting Switch (N2 Bus or
Light-Emitting Diodes Serial Port Ethernet Clip FC Bus
(LEDs) Port Terminal)
350
13.8
LONWORKS® Network Port (NAE4520-2U Model Only)
The LONWORKS network port on the NAE3520-2U is a 3-position removable, keyed terminal block
labeled LON (Figure 48). Use the LONWORKS port to integrate LON device networks into a Metasys®
network. The Shield connection (SHLD) on the LONWORKS port is an open terminal and is not connected
in the NAE.
110
270
10.6
62
2.5
131
5.2
ET SY R
210
LON_SMOKE_NAE35_FRONT_DIMS
8.3
USB
RJ-11 6-Pin Mounting Port
System Status Modem Clip RJ-45 8-Pin LON Bus
RS-232 Mounting
Light-Emitting Diodes Port Serial Port Ethernet Terminal
Clip
(LEDs) Port
350
13.8
Specifications
Power Requirement Dedicated nominal 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply
Conditions 10 to 93% RH, non-condensing
Data Protection Battery Supports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable NiMH battery: 3.6 V, 500 mAh,
with a typical life of 10 years at 70° F (21° C);
Clock Battery Maintains real-time clock through a power failure. On board cell; typical life 10 years at
70° F (21° C)
Processor 192 MHz Renesas™ SH4 7760 RISC processor
Memory 128 MB Flash nonvolatile memory for operating system, configuration data, and operations
data storage and backup
128 MB Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM) for operations data
dynamic memory
Operating System Microsoft® Windows® CE embedded
Network and Serial One Ethernet port; 10/100 Mb; 8-pin RJ-45 connector
Interfaces One optically isolated RS-485 port; 9600 baud; with a pluggable and keyed 4-position
terminal block
Two RS-232-C serial ports, with standard 9-pin sub-D connectors, that support all standard
baud rates
One USB serial port with standard USB connector
Protection: IP20 (IEC 60529) Mounting On flat surface with screws on three mounting feet
or single DIN rail
Compliance United UL Listed, File S4977, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
States FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Europe CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61000-6-3 (2001) Generic
Emission Standard for Residential
and Light Industry and EN 61000-6-2 (2001) Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy
Industrial Environment
Australia C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
and New
Zeland
Dimensions 152 x 270 x 62 mm (6.0 x 10.7 x 2.5 in.)
(Height x Width x Depth) Minimum space for mounting NAE45: 190 x 280 x 85 mm (7.5 x 11.5 x 3.5 in.)
UL Label Placement
Figure 49: UL Label Placement for the MS-NAE4510-2U and MS-NAE4520-2U
The Network Automation Engine (NAE) is a Web-enabled, Ethernet-based, supervisory device
that monitors and controls networks of field-level building automation devices, HVAC
equipment, lighting, and smoke control. Figure 50 shows a smoke control NAE3510-2U (MS/TP)
and Figure 51 shows a smoke control NAE3520-2U (LON) model.
Use the Smoke Control NAE MS-NAE35x0-2U to interface all input and output smoke control
points. Place the Smoke Control NAE in a locked enclosure.
Device Layout
MS-NAE3510-2U
The MS-NAE3510-2U is designed to control one field controller MS/TP FC Bus trunk. The RJ-11, 6-Pin
jack labeled FC BUS (Figure 52) is an FC bus service port. See Figure 52 for the location of the power
supply terminal, network terminals, Universal Serial Bus (USB) port, and Ethernet port on the MS/TP
NAE.
110
270
10.6
62
2.5
131
5.2 RJ-11 6-Pin
Field Controller
ET SY R
Service Port
210
8.3
NAE45_FRONT_DIMS
USB
RJ-11 6-Pin Mounting Port End-of-Line FC Bus
System Status Modem Clip RJ-45 8-Pin
Port RS-232 Mounting Switch Terminal
Light-Emitting Diodes Serial Port Ethernet Clip
(LEDs) Port
350
13.8
MS-NAE3520-2U
The MS-NAE3520-2U is designed with a LONWORKS network port. The LONWORKS network
port is a 3-position removable, keyed terminal block labeled LON (Figure 53). Use the LON port
to integrate LON device networks into a Metasys® network. The Shield connection (SHLD) on
the LONWORKS port is an open terminal and is not connected in the NAE.
See Figure 53 for the location of the power supply terminal, network terminals, Universal Serial
Bus (USB) port, and Ethernet port on the MS-NAE3520-2U.
110
270
10.6
62
2.5
131
5.2
ET SY R
210
8.3
LON_NAE35_FRONT_DIMS
USB
RJ-11 6-Pin Mounting Port
System Status Modem Clip RJ-45 8-Pin LON Bus
RS-232 Mounting
Light-Emitting Diodes Port Serial Port Ethernet Terminal
Clip
(LEDs) Port
350
13.8
Wiring Considerations and Guidelines for Network Integrations
Table 16: Guidelines for MS/TP (FC Bus) Network Topology
Category Rules/Maximums Allowed
General One FC Bus per NAE35 and NAE45
Only daisy-chained devices
Number of FC Devices Supported NAE45 models support up to 1001 devices on the FC Bus trunk with no more than
two repeaters between an NAE and any device and a maximum of 50 devices
between repeaters.
NAE35 models support up to 501 devices on the FC Bus trunk with no more than two
repeaters between an NAE and any device and a maximum of 50 devices between
repeaters.
Cable Length and Type 1,500 m (5,000 ft) twisted pair cable without a repeater
4,500 m (15,000 ft) twisted pair cable from an NAE and the farthest FC device (three
segments of 1,500 m [5,000 ft] each, separated by repeaters)
2,000 m (6,600 ft) between two fiber media convertors
Cable Wire Type and Size Solid or stranded 22 AWG recommended (24 AWG twisted pair or larger is
acceptable)
Terminations Two FC Bus devices with EOL switches in the ON position, one at each end of each
FC Bus segment
1. If TEC Thermostat Controllers or third-party devices are used on the FC Bus, the maximum total number of devices is 32
and the maximum length is 1,219 m (4,000 ft).
Table 17: NAE Ethernet Network Rules

Category Rules/Maximums Allowed1
General Point-to-point star topology with network hubs/switches
Number of Devices Maximum of 100 supervisory devices may be connected to one site in the
Metasys system extended architecture.
Line Length and Type 2000 m (6600 ft) for plastic/glass fiber optic with external adapter
100 m (330 ft) CAT5 cable
Terminations For 10/100BaseT, no line terminators allowed
Transient Protection A PNET1GB transient protector is required at each end of every ethernet
connection
1. See Surge Protection Devices and Network Communications for more information.
Powering On the NAE
After applying 24 VAC power, the NAE requires up to 3 minutes to start up and become
operational. See the LED Test Sequence at Startup section.
Startup is complete and the NAE is operational when the (green) RUN LED is On steady and the
(red) FAULT LED is Off (Figure 55).

When 24 VAC supply power to an NAE is disconnected or lost, the NAE is non-operational, but
the POWER LED (Figure 55) remains On and the data protection battery continues to power the
NAE for several (1 to 5) minutes while volatile data is backed up in nonvolatile memory. The
RUN LED goes Off when data backup and shutdown are complete.
IMPORTANT: The data protection battery must be installed and charged before
disconnecting the 24 VAC supply power.
Setting the MS-NAE3510-2U’s End-of-Line Switch

MS/TP network devices at either end of an FC Bus must be set as network terminated devices.
The MS-NAE3510-2U has an End-of-Line (EOL) switch that allows you to set the NAE as a
network terminated device. The MS-NAE3510-2U is shipped with the EOL switch in the factory
default, ON (up) position (Figure 54).
1
NAE45_EOL
Figure 54: FC Bus EOL Switch in the Factory Default ON (Up) Position
The MS-NAE3510-2U follows the same rules as other MS/TP terminated devices. See
NU-RPT101-0U RS-485-to-RS-485 Repeater on page 118 for details.
Troubleshooting
LED Status Indicators

The Smoke Control NAE35 and NAE45 models have 9 LEDs to indicate power and network
communication status. Figure 55 shows the LEDs and Table 18 describes the LED indications.
Figure 55: Smoke Control NAE 35/45 FC Bus (left) and LON Bus (right) LED Designations
LED Test Sequence at Startup
During startup, the NAE automatically initiates an LED test to verify the operational status of the LEDs.
Immediately after connecting supply power, the following LED lighting sequence occurs:
1. The POWER, BAT FAULT, 10 LINK, FAULT, RUN, and PEER COM LEDs turn On, indicating that
the Operating System (OS) is booting up. (After 2 seconds, the LEDs may change states depending
on site-specific network activity.)
2. The BAT FAULT, PEER COM, and FAULT LEDs shut Off. The RUN LED flashes to indicate that
the NAE software is loading.
3. The LEDs display the operational status of the NAE. When the RUN LED goes On Steady, startup is
complete, and the NAE is operational.
Note: The total time to start up the NAE depends on the size of the database and can take several
minutes.
Table 18: NAE LED Designations, Normal Status and Descriptions
LED Designation Normal Descriptions/Other Conditions
Status
POWER (Green) On Steady On Steady = Unit is getting power from either the battery or 24 VAC
power.
Off Steady = Unit is shut down.
ETHERNET (Green) Flicker Flicker = Data is transferring on the Ethernet connection. Ethernet traffic
is general traffic (may not be for the NAE).
Off Steady = No Ethernet traffic, probably indicates a dead Ethernet
network or bad Ethernet connection.
10/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 10 Mbps.
100/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 100 Mbps.
FC BUS (Green) Flicker Flicker = Normal communications; the FC Bus is transmitting and
NAE3510-2U and receiving data. Flickers are generally in sync with data transmission, but
NAE4510-2U models should not be used to indicate specific transmission times.
only Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC Bus in the NAE.
LON (Green) Flash Indicates regular LON heartbeat commnications.
NAE3520-2U and
NAE4520-2U models
only
PEER COM (Green) Varies (see Flicker = Data traffic between NAE devices. For an NAE that is not a Site
next column) Director, this LED indicates regular heartbeat communications with the
Site Director. For a Site Director NAE, flashes are more frequent and
indicate heartbeat communications from all other NAE devices on the
site. For a single NAE on a network without an Application and Data
Server (ADS), there is no flicker.
RUN (Green) On Steady On Steady = NAE software is running.
On 1 second, Off 1 second = NAE software is in startup mode.
On 0.5 seconds, Off 0.5 seconds = NAE software is shutting down.
Off Steady = Operating system is shutting down or software is not
running.
BAT FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = Battery defective. Flicker = Data Protection Battery is not
installed. Connect or install battery.
FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = General Fault. Fault conditions are user configurable in
software. Preconfigured fault conditions include excessive Central
Processing Unit (CPU) flash or memory use, excessive Printed Wire
Board (PWB) temperature.
Specifications
Power Requirement Dedicated nominal 24 VAC
Temperature
Ambient Operating 10 to 93% RH, non-condensing
Conditions
Data Protection Battery Supports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable NiMH battery: 3.6 V, 500
mAh, with a typical life of 10 years at 70° F (21° C);
Clock Battery Maintains real-time clock through a power failure. On board cell; typical life 10
years at 70° F (21° C)
Processor 192 MHz Renesas™ SH4 7760 RISC processor
Memory 128 MB Flash nonvolatile memory for operating system, configuration data, and
operations data storage and backup
128 MB Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM) for operations
data dynamic memory
Operating System Microsoft® Windows® CE embedded
Network and Serial One Ethernet port; 10/100 Mb; 8-pin RJ-45 connector
Interfaces One optically isolated RS-485 port; 9600 baud; with a pluggable and keyed
4-position terminal block
One RS-232-C serial ports, with standard 9-pin sub-D connectors, that support all
standard baud rates
(Only the models without an optional internal modem have a second serial port
that supports an optional, user-supplied external modem)
One USB serial port with standard USB connector
Options: One Telephone port for internal modem; up to 56 Kbps; 6-pin RJ-11
connector (Models with an optional internal modem have one RS-232-C serial port
only.)
Dimensions (Height x Width x 152 x 270 x 62 mm (6.0 x 10.7 x 2.5 in.)
Depth) Minimum space for mounting NAE45: 190 x 280 x 85 mm (7.5 x 11.5 x 3.5 in.)
Protection: IP20 (IEC 60529) Mounting On flat surface with screws on three
mounting feet or single DIN rail
Compliance United States UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal
Equipment
Europe CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61000-6-3 (2001)
Generic Emission Standard for Residential
and Light Industry and EN 61000-6-2 (2001) Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy
Industrial Environment
Australia and C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
New Zeland
UL Label Placement
Figure 56: UL Label Placement for the MS-NAE3510-2U and MS-3520-2U
MS/TP Field Bus
Introduction
The BACnet® protocol MS/TP Communications Bus is a local network that connects supervisory
controllers and field controllers to field point interfaces.
This section describes the specifications, device limits, and rules of the MS/TP Communications
Bus. It describes how to wire and terminate devices and troubleshoot the communications of
devices on the MS/TP Bus.
This section helps you understand the rules, specifications, and MS/TP configuration and
installation.
MS/TP Bus Overview

The BACnet® protocol MS/TP Communications Bus is high-baud RS-485 protocol network bus
that connects Metasys NAEs to Metasys BACnet MS/TP field controllers and control point
interfaces (IOMs). The MS/TP Communications Bus (Figure 57) supports two bus types/levels of
buses:
• a Field Controller Bus (FC) - connects NAEs to MS/TP field controllers and IOMs
• a Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA) - connects the MS/TP controllers to IOMs, thermostats, sensors
and other slave level network devices
The FC Bus and the SA Bus are networks of daisy-chained devices. Each bus has only one bus
supervisor. The bus supervisor communicates with devices on the supervised bus and with the
next (higher level) bus on the network. The bus supervisor typically starts the communication on
the FC bus and SA Bus. If an SA Bus or FC Bus does not have a bus supervisor, the device with
the lowest device address value on the bus starts the communication.
Ethernet Network
NAE
FC Bus
FIG_MS-TP
ET SY R
Supervisor
FC Bus
SA Bus
Supervisor CLE AR =LO W RE D=H IG H
35 IN -LB 4
( Nm) 60 SE CO ND S
FEC
UN I VE RS A L
+15 AL LF E
I LD TER M NI ALS A RE PO WER LI M T
I ED
O UT 1
IN
M A NU A L O CO M 1
I CO M
O VE R RI D E
AD D RE S S 0=O FF
B I NA RY
O UT 2
O CO M 2
ON
S A B US
F AU LT
P O WE R
O UT 3
SE NS O R
O CO M 3
P OW ER
SA
PWR MS-VM A1 620 -0
SA BU S
CO N FI G UR A B LE
FA U LT
CO M P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2 O UT 4
O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2,
– S A BU S O CO M 4
P IL O T DU TY
FC BU S
+
O UT 5
FC
EO L O CO M 5
ET SY
SHLD
F CBUS
HO T
CO M
24
–
OP ENE NERG Y
+ MA NAG EMEN T CO M
EQ UP
I M ENT
15U0
R
SA Bus
N
O
VMA SA Bus
Supervisor
Network SA Bus
Sensor
Network
Sensor
ON
S A BU S
FA U LT
P O WER
Network
E T SY
R
Sensor
N
O
IOM
Figure 57: Example MS/TP Network
FC Bus Overview
The FC Bus connects Field Equipment Controllers (FECs), Variable Air Volume Modular Assemblies
(VMAs), Input/Output Modules (IOMs), and TEC26xx Series network thermostats to a Metasys system
Network Automation Engine (NAE).
On an FC Bus, the NAE is the bus supervisor and has a fixed device address of 0 on the bus. See Device
Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 86.
An FC Bus can be divided into (up to three) bus segments using network repeaters (Figure 58). See FC
Bus Rules and Specifications on page 107.
FC Bus
4570 m (15,000 ft) Maximum
100 Total Metasys Devices (maximum)
Bus Segment Bus Segment Bus Segment

NAE 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections
ET S Y R
T
EOL Switch T T T T T
R R
ON
FIG_FC_SEGS
Note: When TEC26xx Series thermostats and/or third-party BACnet T = EOL Termination switch ON
MS/TP devices are connected to the FC Bus, a bus segment supports
only up to 32 devices and an FC Bus supports only up to 64 devices. R = Repeater
Figure 58: FC Bus with Three Bus Segments
SA Bus Overview
The SA Bus connects FECs and VMAs to point devices such as IOMs, network thermostats, and network
sensors to controllers on the FC Bus.
On an SA bus, an FEC or VMA is the bus supervisor and always has a fixed device address of 0. See
Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 86.
The SA Bus does not support bus segments (Figure 59). See SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page
109 for more information.
1200 ft (maximum)
10 Nodes (maximum)
FEC/VMA1600
P O WE R ET S Y R
FA U LT
S A BU S
T
O
ON
N
EOL ON
SA_Segment
(Fixed)
T = EOL fixed ON
Figure 59: SA Bus
Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus
An MS/TP bus can be configured to communicate at one of four different baud rates. All devices
on the MS/TP bus must communicate at the same baud rate.
The baud rate setting determines the rate at which devices communicate data over the bus. The
baud rate settings available on Metasys MS/TP devices are 9600, 19,200, 38,400, 76,800, and
Auto.
We recommend setting all MS/TP bus supervisors to 38,400.
In the Auto setting, the Metasys devices listen for the bus supervisor to communicate first, the
devices then automatically set their baud rate to the bus supervisor’s baud rate. We recommend
setting all field controllers on the FC Bus (FECs, VMAs, and IOMs) to Auto.
TEC26xx Series thermostats automatically set their baud rate to the bus supervisor’s baud rate.
The baud rate setting on bus repeaters and third-party MS/TP devices typically is configured
manually at the device and the baud rate setting must match the setting of the bus supervisor.
Refer to the manufacturer’s product documentation for information on setting the device’s baud
rate.
Note: Some third-party devices do not support all four baud rates. The NAE55xx-0 models do
not support 76,800 baud.
The two device attributes related to the baud rate are Baud Rate Selection and Active Baud
Rate. The Baud Rate Selection attribute allows you to use the SCT (for NAEs) or the CCT (for
FECs, VMAs, and IOMs) to set the baud rate for the device. The Active Baud Rate attribute
allows you to view the baud rate at which the device is communicating on the active bus when
Auto baud is selected. For more information on Metasys system attributes, refer to the Metasys
system Help.
Higher baud rates require a limited range of wire gauge. There is a direct relationship among the
baud rate, wire gauge, and wire length that determines the number of devices allowed on the bus.
Higher baud rates support more devices, but require small gauge wire (which provides lower
capacitance). A lower baud rate may be required in order to use existing, larger gauge wire (which
has higher capacitance), but may support fewer devices. We recommend 38,400 baud using 22
AWG stranded wire. This provides the best balance between performance and installation
sensitivity.
For more details on baud rate, wire gauge, wire length, and the number of devices see MS/TP Bus
Cable Recommendations on page 111.
Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus
Each device connection on an MS/TP Bus requires a device address to coordinate communication on the
bus. Each bus has a set of device addresses which is separate and independent from the device addresses
on all other buses. Devices connected to both an FC Bus and SA Bus have two different device
addresses, one for each device connection.
In the MS/TP bus hierarchy, device connections on separate buses can have the same device address.
Every bus supervisor connection on an MS/TP bus, for example, has a device address of 0 (zero), and the
device address for the first network sensor on many SA Buses is 199. Figure 60 shows an example of an
MS/TP bus and the device addresses for connections on the FC Bus and the SA Buses.
Ethernet Network
NAE
FC Bus
ET S Y R
Supervisor
0
FC Bus and Addresses
SA Bus FEC
5 6 7 (on FC Bus)
Supervisor
0 CLE AR =LO WRE D=H IG H
35 IN - LB (4 Nm) 60 SE CO ND S
U N IV ER S AL
AL LF E
I LD TER M N I ALS A RE PO WER L M
I IT ED
+15 O UT 1
IN O CO M 1
M A NU A L
I CO M O VE R RI D E
AD D RE SS 0=OF F
B IN A RY
O UT 2
FC Bus FC Bus FC Bus

O CO M 2
ON
S A BU S
FA U LT
P O WE R
O UT 3
S EN S OR
O CO M 3
SA
PWR
P OW ER
MS-VM A1 620 -0
Device Device Device 8

SA B U S
CO N FI G UR A BL E
FA U LT O UT 4
CO M P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2
S A BU S O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2,
O CO M 4
– P IL O T DU T Y
FC BU S
+
O UT 5
FC O CO M 5
EO L
E T SY
SHLD
F C B US
HO T
CO M
24
– OP ENE NERG Y
MA NAG EMEN T CO M
+ EQ UP
I M ENT
15U0
R
SA Bus 4
N
O
and VMA
Addresses (on FC Bus) 0 SA Bus
Network Supervisor
199 Sensor
Network
Sensor 199
200 SA Bus
and
ON
SA BU S
FA UL T
PO W ER
Addresses
ET S Y
Network
R
Network 4
N
O
Sensor
Sensor IOM
FIG_NET_ADDRSS
201 Network
Sensor
200
Figure 60: Example MS/TP Bus Showing FC Bus and SA Bus Addresses
The NAE is the bus supervisor on an FC Bus. The FEC or VMA is the bus supervisor on an SA Bus. Bus
supervisors have a fixed device address of 0 (zero) that cannot be changed (Figure 60). Depending on the
model, a network sensor has either a fixed address of 199 or can be assigned a switch-selectable address
between 200 and 203. Table 20 on page 87 provides a list of the MS/TP device address values and
address value ranges for devices connected to an MS/TP bus.
Token-passing messages are sent from address to address in consecutive order, therefore any gaps in the
device address range reduce bus performance while the message negotiates the gap to find the next
device address on the bus. Start with the lowest device address value and use consecutive address values
for optimal bus performance. Table 20 lists the address ranges.
Note: The devices on the bus do not need to be physically wired in sequential order as long as there are
no gaps in the address value range.
Table 20: Valid MS/TP Bus Address and Value Ranges
Address Class Examples
Value/Address
Range
0 Bus Supervisor NAE on the FC Bus
FEC and VMA on the SA Bus
1 Reserved Wireless Commissioning Converter
2-3 Reserved Reserved for future use.
4 - 127 Master Range FEC, VMA, IOM, TEC26xx on the FC Bus
IOM on the SA Bus
128 - 254 Slave Range Slave devices and network sensors on the SA Bus
198 Reserved VAV Balancing Sensor (handheld)
199 Reserved Most NS Series Network Sensor models or VAV Balancing Sensor
(wall-mounted)
200 - 203 Reserved NS Series Network Sensors (specified models)
255 Broadcast Do not apply address 255 to any device.
Setting a Device Address

For most (non-supervisory) devices on an FC Bus or SA Bus, the device address is set using the
DIP switches on the device’s ADDRESS DIP switch block. The DIP switches are binary switch
blocks and each switch represents a binary numerical value when the switch is in the ON position.
The device address set on the ADDRESS DIP switch block applies to only the bus where the
device is not the bus supervisor. For example, the DIP switches on an FEC set the FC Bus address.
If the FEC also supervises an SA Bus, the FEC’s SA Bus address is 0 by default (Figure 60). The
switches on the IOM set the address of the FC Bus or SA Bus depending on the bus on which the
IOM is located.
As you set the device address, the best-practice is to set the highest switch value first, then the
next highest switch value, and so on, until the total of the switch values equal the intended device
address. For example, to set a device address for a device on an SA Bus to 227, position switch
128 to ON first, then 64, 32, 2, and 1. Positioning switches 16, 4, and 1 to ON (as shown in
Figure 61) sets the device address to 21 for a device on the FC Bus.
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
ON
Figure 61: Setting the Device Address

on the ADDRESS DIP Switch Block
Note: Devices may go offline momentarily when a device address is changed on an active bus, but the
bus devices and bus supervisor do not need to be reset after changing a device address.
Some devices, such as the TEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party MS/TP devices, use their own
configuration settings to establish the device address on the bus. Refer to the device manufacturer’s
product documentation for instructions on setting the device address. The device address values for
TEC26xx thermostats and all third-party devices must comply with the rules and ranges described above.
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit

The MS/TP FC bus and SA bus communication lines must have an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP MOV kit
installed when the conduit run between enclosures does not remain in the same room.
Installation Requirements
Care must be taken when installing transient protectors (MOV kits) in close proximiy to other protectors.
Use the information below to install the MOV kit.
• Before installing the MOV kit to the MS/TP terminal block, twist it together with the field lead and
insert it in the terminal block as one wire.
• Twist the wire tightly around the transient protection device a minimum of two turns before inserting
it into the terminal block.
• When more that two wires are to be placed under a single terminal screw, the wires must be soldered
together with a single 6 inch length of 18 AWG wire having a minimum insulation thickness of 1/64
inch. The exposed solder connection must be covered with a UL recgonized component heat shrink.
The single wire end that will be inserted into the terminal must be stripped and then tinned or
crimped with a suitable lug that fits securely under the terminal screw. The single wire end that will
be attached to earth ground must be stripped and crimped with a suitable lug that will fit securely
under the grounding screw.
Figure 62 shows wire runs to MS/TP equipment in cabinets in various rooms and the correct use
of the SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP to protect the MS/TP devices from transients.
Figure 62: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Communication Wiring
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations
Figure 63 shows a SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP and its wiring when the wiring terminates at the MS/TP FC
Bus communication terminal block.
Figure 63: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP MS/TP FC Bus Communication Wiring

Terminations
Figure 64 shows the SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP wiring for an FC Bus when the FC Bus
communication wiring does not terminate at the MS/TP FC Bus terminal block.
Figure 64: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP FC Bus Wiring Terminations - Multiple MSTP Wires
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations
Figure 65 shows a SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP and its wiring when the SA Bus communication wiring
terminates at the MS/TP SA Bus terminal block.
Figure 65: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP MS/TP SA Bus Communication Wiring

Terminations
Figure 66 shows the SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP wiring for an SA Bus when the SA Bus
communication wiring does not terminate at the MS/TP SA Bus terminal block.
Figure 66: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP SA Bus Wiring Terminations - Multiple MSTP Wires
MOV Requirements for MS/TP I/O Terminals
All MS/TP controller input terminals and output terminals must have an MOV from a
SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 placed between earth ground and each Power terminal, I/O Common terminal, and
I/O terminal.
The MS/TP field device’s I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 MOV kit installed when the
conduit run between the enclosures and an MS/TP I/O field device does not remain in the same room.
Note: The SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 kit contains 10 MOVs.
Care must be taken when installing transient protectors (MOV kits) in close proximiy to other protectors.
Use the information below to install the MOV kit.
• Before installing the MOV kit to the MS/TP I/O terminal block, twist it together with the field lead
and insert it in the terminal block as one wire.
• Twist the wire tightly around the transient protection device a minimum of two turns before inserting
it into the terminal block.
When more that two wires are to be placed under a single terminal screw, the wires must be soldered
together with a single 6 inch length of 18 AWG wire having a minimum insulation thickness of 1/64
inch. The exposed solder connection must be covered with a UL recgonized component heat shrink. The
single wire end that will be inserted into the terminal must be stripped and then tinned or crimped with a
suitable lug that fits securely under the terminal screw. The single wire end that will be attached to earth
ground must be stripped and crimped with a suitable lug that will fit securely under the grounding screw.
Note: The SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 contains 10 individual MOVs.
Figure 67 shows the MSTP controller I/O terminal block SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 connections using
3 MOVs from the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 kit..
Figure 67: SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 MSTP I/O Wiring Terminations
End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus

Daisy-chained RS485-protocol networks typically require some type of End-of-Line (EOL)
termination to reduce interference caused by signal reflection that occurs when data transmissions
reach the end of a bus segment and bounce back on the segment. The high baud rates on MS/TP
bus applications require robust EOL termination and strict adherence to the EOL termination
rules. Figure 68 shows an example of the EOL termination settings on an MS/TP bus application.
The EOL termination requirements for FC Buses are different from the SA Bus requirements. See
SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page 109 and EOL Termination on the SA Bus on page 100 for
more information on terminating the MS/TP bus.
Ethernet Network
NAE45
Network_example
EOL Switch
ON (Up)
ET S Y R
T
FC Bus
SA Bus
CLE AR =LO WRE D=H IG H
35 IN - LB (4 Nm) 60 SE CO ND S
U N IV E RS AL
+15 AL LF E
I LD TER M N I ALS A RE PO WER LI M T
I ED
O UT 1
IN
M A NU A L O CO M 1
I CO M
O VE R RI D E
AD D RE SS 0=OF F
B IN A RY
O UT 2
T
O CO M 2
FC Bus FC Bus FC Bus
ON
SA B U S
FA ULT
PO WE R
O UT 3
S EN S OR
O CO M 3
T
P OW ER
Device Device Device

SA
PWR
MS-VM A1 620 -0
SA B U S
CO N FI G UR A BL E
FA U LT O UT 4
CO M P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2
S A BU S O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2,
– O CO M 4
P IL O T DU TY
FC BU S
+
O UT 5
FC
EO L O CO M 5
ET S Y
SHLD
F C B US
HO T
CO M
24
–
OP ENE NERG Y
MA NAG EMEN T CO M
+
EQ UP
I M ENT
15U0
R
EOL OFF
N
O
T
Network VMA1620 FEC1610
Sensor FC Bus EOL OFF FC Bus EOL ON
SA Bus
SA Bus EOL ON SA Bus EOL ON
(Fixed) (Fixed)
Network
Sensor
ON
S A B US
F AU LT
P O WE R
T = EOL switch set to ON
ET S Y
R
T = EOL fixed ON T
N
O
IOM3710
SA Bus EOL ON - Recommended
(EOL OFF - Acceptable)
Figure 68: EOL Termination on an MS/TP Bus
End-of-Line Termination Switch Locations

EOL termination on the FC Bus is enabled with a switch on the MS/TP device (Figure 69) and
(Figure 70). EOL termination on the SA Bus is fixed On on the MS/TP device.
CLEAR=LOW RED=HIGH 35 IN-LB (4Nm) 60 SECONDS

U NIVERSAL
+15 ALL FIELD TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

OUT 1
IN
OCOM 1
ICOM
ADDRESS 0=OFF
BINARY
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
SENSOR
OCOM 3
SA
PW R MS-VMA1620-0
SA BUS
CONFIGURABLE
OUT 4
COM PWR IN: 24VAC 2.5A, CLASS 2
OUT PU TS: 24VAC 0.5A, CL ASS 2, OCOM 4
– PILOT DUTY
+
OUT 5
FC
EO L OCOM 5
SHLD
FC BUS
COM
24
ET SY R ET SY R
FAULT FAULT
Figure 69: MS/TP Controllers Set as EOL Termination Devices
End-of-Line
(EOL) Switches
in On Position
LON
SHIELD
LON A
LON B
1
ON
NAE55_LON_EOL
Figure 70: MS/TP NAE5510-1U Controller Set as EOL Termination Devices
FC and SA Bus Device EOL Switch Details

MS/TP NAEs connect only to FC Buses. FECs and VMAs can connect to an FC Bus and an SA
Bus simultaneously. The EOL switches on NAEs, FECs, and VMAs enable EOL termination on
the FC Bus only.
Smoke Control NAE5510-1U models have two FC Bus ports and EOL switches, and each EOL
switch is double-pole.
Smoke Control NAE3510-2U and 4510-2U models have one FC Bus port and one double-pole
EOL switch.
Note: The FECs or VMAs do not have EOL switches for the SA Bus and these controllers are
always (fixed ON) SA Bus EOL termination devices.
IOMs connect to either an FC Bus or SA Bus. IOMs can not simultaneously connect to the FC
Bus and SA Bus. The EOL switch on IOMs enables an IOM as an EOL termination device on
either an FC Bus or an SA Bus.
IMPORTANT: The TEC Series Thermostat Controllers cannot be used as End-of-Line (EOL)
devices. You can use the MS-BACEOL-0 RS-485 EOL Terminator to provide EOL termination on
Metasys® RS-485 protocol FC segments when the terminating field device does not have integral
EOL termination capability.
EOL Termination on the FC Bus
A MS/TP FC Bus may consist of up to three bus segments. Each bus segment on an FC Bus requires two
EOL termination devices, one at each end of the bus segment. All other devices on the FC Bus should
have their EOL termination disabled (EOL switches OFF). See Figure 71.
FC Bus
4570 m (15,000 ft) Maximum
100 Total Metasys Devices (maximum)
NAE
(FC Bus Bus Segment Bus Segment Bus Segment
Supervisor) 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections
ET S Y R
T
EOL Switch T T T T T
R R
ON
FIG_FC_SEGS
Note: When TEC26xx Series thermostats and/or third-party BACnet T = EOL Termination switch ON
MS/TP devices are connected to the FC Bus, a bus segment supports
only up to 32 devices and an FC Bus supports only up to 64 devices. R = Repeater
Figure 71: Example of Proper EOL Termination on an FC Bus
FC Bus EOL Termination Scenarios
The FC Bus requires EOL terminations on the devices at the end of each bus segment on the FC
Bus. Figure 72 shows examples of FC Bus EOL termination in four different FC Bus scenarios.
5,000 ft (maximum)
NAE
Scenario 1 ET SY
FC Bus with an
R
T
NAE at the end T
of the line EOL Switch
ON (Up)
5,000 ft (maximum)
NAE
Scenario 2
FC Bus with an ET SY R
NAE not at the

end of the line T T
EOL Switch
OFF (Down)
FC Bus Segment 1 FC Bus Segment 2

5,000 ft (maximum) 5,000 ft (maximum)
NAE
SCenario 3
FC Bus in two ET SY R
T T T T
segments with
the repeater at EOL Switch
the end of both ON (Up) R
segments
FC Bus Segment 1
5,000 ft (maximum)
NAE
Scenario 4
T
FC Bus in two
ET SY R
T
segments with
the repeater not EOL Switch
ON (Up) R
at the end of both
segments T
FC Bus Segment 2
5,000 ft (maximum)

FC_EOL
R = Repeater
T
= FC Bus Device
Figure 72: FC Bus Termination Scenarios
Note: Set the EOL termination switch on a repeater to ON only when the repeater terminates a
bus segment at the repeater. See Scenario 4 in Figure 72.
EOL Termination on the SA Bus
An SA Bus is a single-segment bus only. NAEs, FECs, or VMAs are always (fixed ON) EOL termination
devices on an SA Bus. An IOMs EOL termination is enabled by positioning the IOM EOL switch to ON.
Since an SA Bus is always connected to a supervisory/master controller (FEC and VMA) or an IOM, an
SA Bus always meets the acceptable EOL termination requirements. For enhanced bus performance, it is
preferable to have EOL termination enabled on the devices at each end of the SA Bus. Figure 73 shows
SA Bus EOL termination scenarios.
FEC/VMA1600 T = EOL fixed ON
P O WE R ET S Y R
Best
FA U LT
S A BU S
ON ON
T T
EOL ON
(Fixed)
IOM
EOL = ON
FEC/VMA1600
P O WE R ET S Y R
Acceptable
FA U LT
S A BU S
ON O
N
T
EOL ON
(Fixed)
FEC/VMA1600
SA Bus Devices
P O WE R ET S Y R
FA U LT
Acceptable
S A BU S
O
ON
N
SA_EOL
EOL ON
(Fixed)
Figure 73: SA Bus Termination Scenarios
Note: The MS-BACEOL-0 RS-485 End-of-Line Terminator module is not designed for use on the SA
bus.
SA Buses with Multiple Network Sensors
The SA Bus supports up to four network sensors. Figure 74 shows an example of two SA Buses,
each with four network sensors. To place multiple network sensors on the bus, three of the four
network sensors must be switch addressable model NS-ATN7003-0 or NS-BTN7003-0.
Ethernet Network
NAE55
FC Bus
SA Bus with 3 Daisy-Chained Network Sensors SA Bus with 4 Daisy-Chained Network Sensors
Using Terminal Blocks Plus Using Terminal Blocks
1 Network Sensor with a Modular Jack
VMA1620
=1 0
to 0
0
ss 02-
99
ed 3-
20
to 0
1
to 0
ed 3-
2
to 0
20
2
ss 00
dre 70
ed 3-
to 0
20
ed 3-
1
20
ss 00
FEC1610
ed 3-
to 0
20
dre N7
ss 00
Ad -xxx
ss 700
ed 3-
20
dre N7
ss 00
dre N7
ss 700
Ad S-xT
dre N7
dre N
Ad -xT
NS
Ad -xT
Ad S-xT
dre N
Ad -xT
NS
N
Ad -xT
NS
=1 0
NS
N
ss 01-
99
NS
dre 70
FIG: ns_example
Ad -xxx
NS
Figure 74: SA Bus Example Showing Multiple Networks Sensors
Terminating FC Devices that do not have Integral EOL Termination Capability
MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator Module

The non-smoke control listed MS-BACOL-0 RS-485 EOL terminator provides EOL termination
on FC Bus segments when the terminating device does not have integral EOL termination
capability.
The EOL terminator module is a compact, lightweight, module wrapped in a protective cover that
can be quickly installed in the field in a variety of ways. The EOL connects directly to the
terminating device on a bus segment with the attached wire leads. The EOL requires 24 VAC,
Class 2 power supplied by the field device or other 24 VAC source.
An EOL is required in all Metasys MS/TP applications wherever a terminating a third-party
device that does not have integral EOL termination (for example, TEC26xx Series thermostats)
on an isolated non-smoke FC Bus segment.
The EOL is designed for Metasys RS-485 buses.
IMPORTANT: When you use a third-party device, place a repeater before it.
Third-party devices require an EOL terminator module at the beginning of the
bus. You also must set the EOL switch on the A and B side of the repeater to
EOL. Ensure the last third-party device on the bus has a terminator module. In
addition, a SMOKE-TRNKIT-1 tranzorb must be installed on the repeater’s TB1
and TB2 terminals.
Figure 75: MS-BACEOL-0 FC Bus EOL Terminator
Note: Disable the integral EOL termination on the 3rd party device if the EOL terminator is connected
to a third-party device that has integral EOL termination.
Figure 77: EOL Terminator Connected to a TEC2600 Series Thermostat
Wiring the MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator Module
CAUTION: Risk of Electric Shock

! Disconnect power supply before making electrical connections to avoid electric
shock.
IMPORTANT: Do not connect 24 VAC supply power to the EOL Terminator before wiring is
complete.
IMPORTANT: Use copper conductors only. Ensure all wiring is in accordance with local,
national, and regional regulations.
IMPORTANT: The EOL Terminator is a low-voltage (<30 VAC) device. Do not exceed the
EOL Terminator electrical ratings.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the EOL Terminator. Static electric
discharge can damage the EOL Terminator and void any warranties.
Observe the following guidelines when wiring the EOL terminator:

• The EOL terminator is designed for MS/TP trunks on Metasys RS-485 Buses. Connect the
EOL terminator to only MS/TP trunks on Metasys RS-485 FC Buses.
• Connect the EOL terminator to MS/TP devices that terminate Metasys bus segments and do
not have integral EOL termination capability.
• When a third-party device terminates a Metasys FC Bus segment, it is recommended that any
EOL termination on the third-party be disabled and an EOL terminator be installed to provide
EOL termination on the bus segment.
• When the third-party (terminating) device has only the + and - terminals (no REF or COM),
isolate and insulate the blue REF lead on the EOL (Figure 79).
Connect the EOL FC Bus leads to the appropriate FC Bus terminals on the bus terminating device
(Figure 79).
Connect the EOL 24 VAC power supply leads to a dedicated or surged protected 24 VAC, Class 2
power supply (Figure 79).
Figure 79: Wiring the MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator to a Bus-Terminating Device
Mounting the MS-BACEOL-0U EOL Terminator Module in Plenum Applications
IMPORTANT: Before installing the MS-BACEOL-0 RS-485 EOL Terminator in plenum

applications, verify acceptance of exposed plastic materials in plenum areas with the local
building authority. Building codes for plenum requirements vary by location. Some local
building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment. Check
with the local building authority for local building codes.
Troubleshooting the MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator Module

An improperly wired or malfunctioning EOL terminator may result in loss of network communication or
poor performance on the RS-485 bus.
To troubleshoot the EOL terminator:
1. Check the supply voltage to the EOL to ensure that the voltage is between 18 and 30 VAC:
• If the supply voltage is between 18 and 30 VAC, proceed to Step 2.
• If the voltage is <18 or >30 VAC, troubleshoot the supply power source and bring the supply
voltage into the required range, then proceed to Step 2.
2. With the EOL connected to 24 VAC power and the FC Bus leads disconnected, check the voltage
drop between the REF and FC+ leads and between the REF and FC- leads:
• REF to FC+ should be 2.7 to 3.2 VDC
• REF to FC- should be 2.3 to 2.7 VDC
If the EOL voltages are within these ranges, the EOL is operating properly and is not a source of
communication or performance problems on the bus.
If the EOL voltages are out of either of these ranges, replace the EOL terminator.
3. Reconnect a properly operating EOL terminator to the 24 VAC, Class 2 (network) power
source.
If network communication or performance problems persist, continue troubleshooting the RS-485
bus.
Specifications
Table 21: MS-BACEOL-0 Specifications
Product Code MS-BACEOL-0 RS-485 End-of-Line Terminator
Power Requirements 24 VAC, 1.2 VA Maximum
Wiring Terminations and Power: Two 200 mm (8 in.) 22 AWG wire leads for 24 VAC supply power connections
Network Interfaces Network: Three 200 mm (8 in.) 22 AWG wire leads for RS-485 Bus connections
Temperature
Ambient Operating 10 to 93% RH, non-condensing
Humidity
Dimensions 70 x 38 x 10 mm (2-3/4 x 1-1/2 x 3/8 in.) with five 20 cm (8 in.) 20 AWG wire leads
Shipping Weight 40.0 g (1.4 oz)
Compliance United States: UL Listed, File S4977, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management
Equipment
FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
UL Listed, File S4977, CCN UUKL, UL 864, Control Units and Accessories for Fire
Alarm Systems
Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal
Equipment. Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003
Europe: CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 50081-1, Class
B, Generic emission standard for residential, commercial and light industry, and EN
50082-2/EN 61000-6-2, Generic immunity standard for heavy industrial environment
Australia and New Zealand: C-Tick Mark, Australia/New Zealand Emissions
Compliant
FC Bus Rules when using TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices
If TEC26xx Series thermostats and/or third-party BACnet MS/TP devices are connected on an FC Bus,
then they must be isolated from the MS/TP bus using a NU-RPT101-1U repeater.
When a TEC26xx Series thermostat terminates an isolated FC Bus bus-segment, an EOL Terminator
module (MS-BACEOL-0) must be wired to the FC Bus terminals on the TEC26xx thermostat. See
Terminating FC Devices that do not have Integral EOL Termination Capability on page 101 for more
information.
If one or more TEC26xx Series thermostats and/or third-party BACnet MS/TP devices are connected on
an isolated FC Bus, the supported maximum device counts, bus segments, and bus length are:
• 64 devices total per FC Bus (maximum)
• 3 bus segments per FC Bus (maximum)
• 32 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 64 devices total on FC Bus)
• 1,220 m (4,000 ft) maximum per bus segment (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted, shielded
cable)
• 3660 m (12,000 ft) maximum per FC Bus (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted, shielded cable)
FC Bus Rules and Specifications
The FC Bus connects field controllers to an NAE. Table 22 and Table 23 provide FC Bus rules
and specifications.
Table 22: FC Bus Rules
Category Rules/Limits
General NAE55 Series models support up to two FC Buses.
NAE35 and NAE45 Series models support one FC Bus.
Only daisy-chained connections (no T or Star topology configurations)
Number of Devices An FC Bus supports up to 100 Metasys devices and up to three bus
segments.
Note: When TEC26xx Series thermostats and/or third-party MS/TP controllers
are connected on the FC Bus, the FC Bus supports only up to 64 devices.
A bus segment on an FC Bus supports up to 50 Metasys devices (but the
total number of Metasys devices on the FC Bus cannot exceed 100).
are connected on the bus segment, the bus segment supports only up to
32 devices per bus segment and the FC Bus supports a maximum of 64
devices.
Up to two cascaded repeaters may be applied to an FC Bus.
Cable Length and Type 1,520 m (5,000 ft.)2 maximum separation between any devices on a bus
segment. Repeaters are used to connect bus segments.
4,570 m (15,000 ft.)2 between any devices on a bus (up to three segments of
1,520 m [5,000 ft.] each using cascaded repeaters). See Figure 58 on page 84.
are connected on the FC Bus:
1. Each bus segment may be up to 1,220 m (4,000 ft) in length (using 22 AWG
3-wire twisted, shielded cable).
2. The FC Bus may be up to 3,660 m (12,000 ft)in length (using 22 AWG 3-wire
twisted, shielded cable).
Recommended 22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Twisted, Shielded Cable
Cable Type1
EOL Termination The EOL switch must be set to On (or an EOL terminator installed) on the two
devices located at either end of each bus segment on an FC Bus.
The EOL switches must be set to Off (or EOL termination disabled) for all other
devices on the FC Bus segment. See SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page
EOL Termination Method Integral EOL Termination switch or add-on EOL Terminator module
(See SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page 109 and Terminating FC
Devices that do not have Integral EOL Termination Capability on page 101 for
more information.)
FC Bus Communication Wiring Requires a SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP for all FC Bus communication terminal wiring.
Transient Protection See SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication
Terminations on page 90 for details.
FC Bus I/O Terminals Transient Requires SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 between all FC Bus I/O terminals
Protection (Power terminals, I/O Common terminals, I/O terminals, and earth ground).
See MOV Requirements for MS/TP I/O Terminals on page 94 for details.
Connecting TEC26xx Series When TEC26xx Series thermostats and/or third-party MS/TP controllers are
thermostats and/or third-party connected on the FC bus segment, an NU-RPT101-0 repeater is required to
MS/TP controllers isolate the FC Bus. See NU-RPT101-0U RS-485-to-RS-485 Repeater on page
1. The recommended cable type provides the best bus performance. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on
page 111 for more information on alternative cable types.
2. If third-party devices are connected to the bus, the cable lengths should be reduced if necessary to match the
third-party vendor recommendations.
Table 23: FC Bus Specifications
Error Checking Message Headers checked using 8 bit CRC test. Message data check using
16-bit CRC test.
Device Addressing 0 - 255 (See Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 86 for more
information.)
Data Transmission Standard RS485
Signaling Method BACnet MS/TP
Signaling Rate 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, or 76,800 baud as selected by bus supervisor
Transient Immunity Meets ENG1000-4 Requirements for heavy industrial applications. Protected
against misapplication of 24 VAC.
EOL Termination Method Integral EOL Termination switch or add-on EOL Terminator module
(See SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page 109 and Terminating FC
Devices that do not have Integral EOL Termination Capability on page 101 for
more information.)
Shield Grounding One (only) hard ground connection per bus segment with shielded cable.
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained
Optional Vendor Components Repeaters
• NU-RPT101-0U (Acromag 4683-TTM-1F (115 VAC))
Note: A repeater is required to support more than 50 devices per trunk
segment and/ or trunk cable segments longer than 1,524 m (5,000 ft.).
MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator
• provides EOL termination on Metasys® RS485 protocol Field Controller
(FC) Bus segments when the terminating field device does not have integral
EOL termination capability.
SA Bus Rules and Specifications
The SA Bus connects input/output point controllers and network sensors to field controllers.
Table 24 and Table 25 provide SA Bus rules and specifications.
Table 24: SA Bus Rules
Category Rules/Limits
General Each bus supervisor supports one SA Bus and each SA Bus supports one segment.
Number of Devices An SA Bus supports up to 10 devices.
Supported on the Bus Note: An SA Bus supports only up to four Network Sensors (due to bus address and
power limits).
SA Buses do not support repeaters.
Cable Length 366 m (1,200 ft.) maximum separation between any devices on the bus
152 m (500 ft.) maximum distance between network sensor and the controller supplying
power (FEC, VMA) using screw terminal blocks
30 m (100 ft.) maximum length for network sensors using the modular jack
366 m (1,200 ft.) maximum Bus Length
Recommended Screw Terminal Connections: 22 AWG Stranded 4-wire, 2-Twisted Pairs, Shielded
Cable Type1 Cable for screw terminals
Modular Jack Connections: 6-Pin RJ-Style Modular Connectors with 24 or 26 AWG
Stranded 6-Wire, 3-Twisted Pairs
EOL Termination Each SA Bus supervisor has integral EOL termination, which typically provides sufficient
EOL termination on an SA Bus. Long SA Bus runs or persistent communication
problems on an SA Bus may require EOL termination at the last device on the SA Bus
(in addition to the integral EOL termination at the SA Bus supervisor).
EOL Termination Integral EOL Termination switch or add-on EOL Terminator module
Method (See SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page 109 and Terminating FC Devices that do
not have Integral EOL Termination Capability on page 101 for more information.)
SA Bus Requires SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP for all FC Bus communication terminal wiring. See
Communication Wiring SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations on page 92 for
Transient Protection details.
SA Bus I/O Terminals Requires SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 between all SA Bus I/O terminals
Transient Protection (Power terminals, I/O Common terminals, I/O terminals, and earth ground).
1. The recommended cable types provide the best bus performance. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on
page 111 for information on alternative cable types.
Table 25: SA Bus Specifications
Error Checking Message Headers checked using 8 bit CRC test.
Message data check using 16-bit CRC test.
Device Addressing 0 - 255 (See Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 86 for more
information.)
Data Transmission RS-485
Standard
Signaling Method BACnet MS/TP
Signaling Rate 9,600, 19,200, 38,400 (default), or 76,800 baud as selected by the bus supervisor
Transient Immunity Meets ENG1000-4 Requirements for heavy industrial applications. Protected
against misapplication of 24 VAC.
Shield Grounding One hard ground per bus when using shielded cable
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained (screw terminal only).
Optional Vendor Transient Eliminator:
Components • Advanced Protection Technologies Transient Eliminator TE/JC04C12
MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations
Table 26 provides cable recommendations for MS/TP applications. The recommended FC Bus
and SA Bus cables are available from Belden CDT® Inc. and Anixter Inc.
Note: For the best performance on MS/TP bus applications, 22 AWG stranded wire in a shielded
cable with proper cable shield grounding is recommended. Other wire gauges and
non-shielded cable may provide acceptable bus performance in many applications,
especially applications that have short cable runs and low ambient inductive noise levels.
See Table 26 and Table 27 for more information.
Table 26: Recommended Cable for FC Buses and SA Buses
Bus and Cable Type Non-Plenum Applications Plenum Applications
Part Number O.D. Part Number O.D.
FC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded, Anixter: 0.138 in. Anixter: CBL-22/3-FC-PVC 0.140 in.
3-Wire Twisted Shielded Cable1 CBL-22/3-FC-PVC Belden: B6501FE
Belden: B5501FE
SA Bus (Terminal Block): Anixter: 0.209 in. Anixter: CBL-22/2P-SA-PLN 0.206 in.
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire, CBL-22/2P-SA-PVC Belden: B6541FE
2 Twisted-Pair Shielded Cable1 Belden: B5541FE
SA Bus (Modular Jack)2: — — Anixter Inc. preassembled: 0.15 in.

26 AWG Stranded 6-Wire, CBL-NETWORK25
3 Twisted-Pair Cable CBL-NETWORK50
CBL-NETWORK75
CBL-NETWORK100
FC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded, Belden: B5501UE 0.135 in. Belden: B6501UE 0.131 in.
3-Wire Twisted Non-Shielded
Cable
SA Bus (Terminal Block): Belden: B5541UE 0.206 in. Belden: B6541UE 0.199 in.
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire,
2 Twisted-Pair Non-Shielded
Cable
Recommended Acceptable
1. A 3-wire (for FC Bus) and 4-wire, 2 twisted-pair (for SA Bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable is strongly
recommended. 22 gauge cable offers the best performance for various baud rates, cable distances and
number of trunk devices primarily due to lower conductor-to-conductor capacitance. Shielded cable offers
better overall electrical noise immunity than non-shielded cable. Observe the shield grounding requirements.
2. 26 AWG stranded, 6-wire, (3 twisted pairs) cable is recommended as the best fit for fabricating modular cables
with the modular jack housing assembly. Be sure the cable you use fits the modular jack housing. The
preassembled cables that are available from Anixter (Part No. CBL-NETWORKxxx) use 24 gauge wire.
MS/TP buses cannot support the same number of devices at every baud rate and wire gauge. See
Table 27. We recommend operating the MS/TP bus at 38,400 baud.
Table 27: FC Bus Wire Gauge vs. FC Bus Baud Rate
AWG Maximum Cable Baud Rate
Wire Length and Node 76,800
96001 19,2001 38,4002
Gauge Connections Limit
18 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 1,219 1,524 305
Length per Bus (5,000) (4,000) (5,000) (1000)
Segment [m (ft)]
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 40/100 50/100 10/30 50/100
Nodes [per Segment /
per FC Bus]
20 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 1,219
Length per Bus (5,000) (4,000)
Segment [m (ft)]
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 40/100 50/100
per FC Bus]
22 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000)
Length per Bus
Segment [m (ft)]
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 50/100
per FC Bus]
24 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000)
Length per Bus
Segment [m (ft)]
per FC Bus]
26 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000)
Length per Bus
Segment [m (ft)]
per FC Bus]
Best Acceptable Acceptable with Possible Restrictions Not Recommended
1. The maximum number of devices is reduced at lower baud rates due to increased token loop times.
2. 3 conductor (FC Bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable is recommended. 22 gauge cable offers the best
performance for various baud rates, cable distances, and number of trunk devices primarily due to lower
conductor-to-conductor capacitance. Shielded cable offers better overall electrical noise immunity than
non-shielded cable.
Wiring the MS/TP Bus

IMPORTANT: Do not apply power to the Metasys network before finishing communication wiring
and checking all wiring connections. Short-circuited or improperly connected wires may result in
IMPORTANT: Use copper conductors only. Make all wiring in accordance with local, national,
and regional regulations. Do not exceed the electrical ratings for the devices on the Metasys network.
IMPORTANT: Do not run network communication cables in the same conduit, raceway, or panel
with any highvoltage (>30 VAC) wiring. Isolate all network devices from high-voltage wiring and
equipment. Failure to isolate network wiring and network devices from high-voltage wiring and
equipment can result in damage to network devices or poor network performance.
IMPORTANT: Properly install, terminate, and ground the cable shield on the FC Bus to minimize
inductive noise, which can result in unreliable communication on the bus.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the network wiring and network devices.
Static electric discharge can damage the network devices and void any warranties.
General MS/TP Bus Wiring Guidelines

Observe the following when installing and wiring the MS/TP Communications Bus:
• Do not run cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends, abrasion, and the potential for
severing or crushing the cable.
• Route cables neatly to promote good ventilation, visibility, testing, and ease of service.
• Provide some slack in the wires and cables to allow for access and servicing.
• Protect, coil, and secure any excess cable.
• Ensure proper grounding for bus cable shielding.
• Ensure proper EOL termination on buses and bus segments.
• Use dedicated transformers for 24 VAC supply power to the network devices or provide surge
protection on the primary side of the 24 VAC supply power transformers to isolate the
network devices from inductive surges or spikes.
FC Bus Wiring Guidelines

The FC Bus is a 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted shielded cable. Figure 4 shows a wiring detail
for the FC Bus terminal blocks.
See Table 27 on page 112 for bus cable length limits.
Follow these guidelines for wiring the FC Bus:
• Wire the bus devices in a daisy-chain network configuration. Maintain polarity (FC+ to FC+,
FC- to FC-, COM to COM, and SHLD to SHLD) along entire bus daisy-chain (Figure 81).
• Twist the FC Bus lead pairs together before inserting into the termination and ensure that the
termination is tight at each terminal block on the daisy-chain.
• Each FC Bus segment must have only one hard ground connection to the cable shield.
• The hard ground connection to the cable shield should be made at the NAE when the NAE
terminates the bus segment. Cable shield ground connection should be made within the first
inch after entering the NAE enclosure.
• All other cable shield connections along the bus segment must be isolated from ground unless
network communication problems persist.
FC Bus and SA Bus Screw Terminations
Both the FC Bus and SA Bus terminations have pluggable screw terminal blocks that allow you to
connect the bus devices in a daisy-chain configuration (Figure 81).
For optimum bus performance, connect the FC Bus cable shield to a metal, earth grounded enclosure at
only one connection on each bus segment. On bus segments connected to an NAE, this connection
should be made within 1 or 2 in. of the NAE. Connect the remaining devices on each bus segment on the
FC Bus as shown in Figure 81.
SHLD
COM
_
+
SA PWR
COM
FC Bus
FIG_FC&SA_TERM
Terminal
+
Block Isolated Shield
Connection
SA Bus
Terminal
Terminal
Block
To Next Device To Next Device

on the FC Bus on the FC Bus
22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Twisted, Shield Cable on the SA Bus on the SA Bus
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire (2 Twisted Pair) Shielded Cable

(One is + and - . The second pair is COM and SA PWR.)
Figure 81: FC Bus and SA Bus Terminal Block Wiring Details
Note: The SHLD terminal on the FC Bus terminal block is electrically isolated from ground and is
provided as a convenient terminal for connecting the cable shield in a daisy-chain on the bus
segment.
Grounding the Cable Shield on MS/TP Bus Segments

Inductive interference and Radio Frequency (RF) interference can adversely affect MS/TP applications,
causing poor bus performance and frequent device offline occurrences. Experience has shown that
installing properly grounded shielded cable in MS/TP applications greatly reduces the impact of ambient
inductive noise and RF interference. Applications installed without shielded cable are much less tolerant
to ambient interference.
We recommended installing MS/TP bus applications using shielded cable. In applications using shielded
cable, it is very important to ensure you ground the cable shield properly. Improper shield grounding can
also result in poor bus performance and frequent device offline occurrences.
To properly ground the cable shield on an MS/TP application, the cable shields on each bus
segment must be connected in a daisy-chain as shown in (Figure 81). Each daisy-chained
segment must be connected at only one point to a hard ground connection. We recommend
making the hard ground connection within the first 2 inches of the cable terminations at the bus
supervisor (the NAE on an FC Bus, and the FEC or VMA on the SA Bus). SA Bus Wiring
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the cable shield is connected to hard ground at only one point
on the bus segment and is completely isolated from hard ground at all other points on the bus
segment. Multiple hard ground connections on a bus segment can create transient currents in
the cable shield, which can result in poor bus performance and frequent device offline
occurrences.
Guidelines
The SA Bus can connected using either a 4-wire (2-twisted pair) cable to the SA Bus (screw)
terminal block or 6-wire cables with RJ-style modular jacks.
SA Bus Screw Terminations

The SA bus is a (2 twisted pair) shielded cable. The + and - leads makeup one twisted pair and the
SA PWR and COM leads makeup the second twisted pair.
• Wire the SA Bus devices in a daisy-chain network configuration. Maintain polarity (SA+ to
SA+, SA- to SA-, COM to COM, and SA PWR to SA PWR) along entire bus daisy-chain.
• Twist the SA bus leads together before inserting into the termination and ensure that the
termination is tight at each terminal block on the daisy-chain.
• Each SA Bus must have only one hard ground connection to the cable shield.
• The single hard ground connection should be made at the bus supervisor where the SA Bus
originates and should be made within one inch of entering an enclosure.
• All shield connections on the SA Bus must be isolated from ground and connected in
continuous segment along the SA Bus.
Note: The SA Bus terminal blocks do not provide an isolated terminal for making cable shield
connections. Use a small wirenut or other suitable connector to daisy-chain and isolate the
cable shield on the SA Bus (Figure 82).
• Isolate the cable shield at the end of the bus segment (opposite the controller).
SA PWR
FIG_SA_TERM
COM
+
SA Bus
Terminal
Block

on the SA Bus on the SA Bus
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire (2 Twisted Pair) Shielded Cable

(One is + and - . The second pair is COM and SA PWR.)
Figure 82: SA Bus Terminal Block Wiring Details
SA Bus 6-Pin RJ-Style Modular Jack and Cables

The 6-pin modular jack SA Bus connection is a straight-through (not a crossover) connection and that
uses a 6-wire connector cable (with 6-pin RJ-style modular jacks) to connect SA devices to network
sensors and the VMA Balancing Sensor. On the 6-wire cable, two wires are used for network
communication, two wires for network sensor power, and two wires supply 15 VDC (200 mA
maximum) power to the devices connected to the sensor.
The Wireless Commissioning Converter is also connected (temporarily) to the SA Bus modular jack to
commission the controller.
The cable connected to the SA Bus 6-pin modular jack can not exceed 30 m (100 ft). The SA Bus 6-pin
modular jack supports only one device and no other SA device may be daisy-chained to the port.
IMPORTANT: Failure to adhere to the wiring details may cause your network sensor to
function incorrectly. You will not be able to connect to the system using the Wireless
Commissioning Converter, the Handheld VAV Balancing Sensor, nor will you be able to
expand the system with future offerings.
Every MS/TP device (except the NAE55) has at least one 6-pin modular jack. Modular jacks on the
network sensors allow you to connect a Wireless Commissioning Converter or VMA Balancing Sensor.
Figure 83 shows the SA Bus modular jack pinouts.
Figure 83: SA Bus 6-Pin Modular Jack Pinout Details
Commissioning Devices on the MS/TP Bus
Commission the devices on the MS/TP Bus using the Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) software.
Applications and device configurations are downloaded to the hardware from the CCT computer using
the Wireless Commissioning Converter or through the NAE from the User Interface (UI).
Hardware points can be auto discovered from the online UI of the NAE, the Application and Data Server
(ADS), or the Extended Application and Data Server (ADX).
NU-RPT101-0U RS-485-to-RS-485 Repeater

Install the repeater inside a UL Listed enclosure (see Enclosures and Accessories). The repeater provides
isolation on the FC Bus end of a smoke control system. Input and output wiring is supervised and
power-limited. The repeater has non-power-limited wiring for the input power source.
The NU-RPT101-0U repeater serves two purposes:
1. Isolate Smoke Control equipment from Non-Smoke Control equipment.
2. Extend the physical length of the FC Bus on a single Smoke Control FC Bus.
Figure 84: NU-RPT101-1U RS-485-to-RS-485 Repeater
Setting EOL for the Repeater
Figure 85 show the EOL jumper locations for the NU-RPT101-1U repeater. Table 28 shows the
EOL jumper settings.
Figure 85: NU-RPT101-1U RS-485-to-RS-485 Repeater EOL Termination
Table 28: EOL Setting for Repeater

Side Jumper If Repeater:
Side A J1 and J2 At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).
Not at end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOL Out).
Side B J3 and J4 At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).
Not at end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOL Out).
Wiring
Transient Protection
Install tranzorbs on the NU-RPT101-1U on both terminal blocks TB1 and TB2. The tranzorbs must be
from tranzorb kit SMOKE-TRNKIT-1, which must be ordered separately. See SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U
Tranzorbs on page 123 for more information.
Note: Two SMOKE-TRNKIT-1 tranzorbs are required (one for TB1 and one for TB2) to protect the
NU-RPT101-1U repeater.
Install the SMOKE-TRNKIT-1 tranzorbs to terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 using the following
procedure(Figure 86):
1. Starting with TB1 (Far Side), strip the FC bus wiring to 0.5 inches.
2. Twist the single wire side of the first tranzorb to the FC COM Far Side wire.
3. Attach the twisted FC COM wires to the TB1 COM terminal.
4. Twist the FC+ Far Side bus wire together with one wire from 2-wire end of the first tranzorb.
5. Attach the twisted wires to the TB1 D+ terminal.
6. Twist the FC- Far Side bus wire together with the remaining 2-wire wire from the first tranzorb.
7. Attach the twisted wires to the TB1 D- terminal.
8. Repeat the process for TB2 (Near Side).
Note: The SMOKE-TRNKIT-1 tranzorb has no polarity. FC Bus wire colors may vary from this
example.
Figure 86: NU-RPT101-1U FC Field and SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Tranzorb
Specifications
Table 29: Physical Specifications
Operating Temp. Range 0 to 49° C (32 to 120° F)
Relative Humidity (RH) 10 to 93% RH, Noncondensing
Power 120VAC, 60 Hz, 0.2A
Power Line Fuse 0.5A, 250V, 3AG type
Power Wire AWG 2 to 18 AWG (without terminal lugs);
14 to 18 AWG (with terminal lugs)
Power Wire Length Less than 32 feet (10 meters) length
Isolation The network repeater provides galvanic and opto-coupler isolation between RS-485(A),
RS-485(B), AC power, and chassis ground. Common mode voltages are permitted up to
250V rms or 354V DC (withstands a 1500V AC dielectric strength test for 1 min. without
breakdown) on a continuous basis. Complies with test requirements outlined in ANSI
C39.5-1974 for voltage ratings specified.
RFI Resistance Withstands an RFI field strength of 10V per meter at 27 Mhz, 151 Mhz, and 467 Mhz
with no digital effect, per SAMA PMC 33.1 test procedures.
Line Noise Effects Field and power line terminals withstand ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1978 Surge Withstanding
Capability (SWC) Test with no component failures.
Unit is tested to a standardized test waveform that is representative of surges (high-freq.
transient electrical interference), observed in actual installations.
Communications Network repeater - both RS-485 conn. use modular terminal blocks with screw clamps.
Connections Wire range 14 to 26 AWG, CSA approval.
Power Wire Network repeater term. block.
Connections
Approvals UL Listed, CSA Certified file LR25710.
Dimensions (L x W x D) 7 x 4.3 x 2.1 in (17.8 x 10.3 x 5.3 cm)
Weight 3.0 pounds (1.4 kg) packed per unit.
Table 30: Communication Specifications

Baud Rates Switch settings on unit for 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, and 76.8K baud
rates. Switch must be in the proper baud rate position for proper operation.
RS-485 Bus Loading One unit load equivalent.
RS-485 Bus Drive Complete RS-485 compliance for up to 32 unit loads (31 unit loads if a repeater is
used).
End-of-Line The EOLN termination network is enabled for the A side or B side when the associated
Termination Network pair of jumpers are positioned over pins 1 and 2. Conversely, the EOLN is disabled (out
of the circuit) when the pair jumpers are positioned over pins 2 and 3.
The EOLN termination network is individually selected on both the A and B sides by a
pair of shorting clips. The A-side is controlled by jumper pair J1, J2 and the B-side is
controlled by jumper pair J3 and J4
Duplex Half-duplex only
Data Format Ten bits typical (1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit). Other formats are supported.
UL Label Placement
Figure 87: Acromag Repeater UL Label Placement
SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Tranzorbs
The SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U is a kit containing 1 transient suppressor (Figure 88). The
SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U is UL Listed for Smoke Control and Energy Management equipment. The
NU-RPT101-1U Repeater requires these tranzorbs on TB1 and TB2.
Figure 88: SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U and a Single Tranzorb

Table 31: SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Specifications
Breakdown Voltage (V(BR) AT IT)1 7.22 V Minimum
7.98 V Maximum
Test Current (IT) 10 mA
Standoff Voltage (VWM) 6.5 V
Maximum Reverse Leakage (AT VWM ID) 400 µA
Maximum Peak Pulse Current (IPPM) 44.7 A
Maximum Clamping Voltage (AT IPPM VC) 11.2 V
Maximum Temperature Coefficient (OF V(BR)) 5.0 mV/°C
1. Pulse Test: tp 50 ms
MS/TP Controllers
FEU16x0 and FEU26x0 Field Equipment Controllers
The FEU16x0 and FEU26x0 controllers are members of the Metasys® system Field Equipment
Controller (FEC) family. They are designed to run a variety of pre-engineered Heating, Ventilation, and
Air Conditioning (HVAC) applications and provide the inputs/outputs required for these applications.
The MS-FEU2610-0U controller consists of two parts which are the mounting base (MS-FEB2610-0)
and the controller cover (MS-FEC2610-0).
The MS-FEU2620-0U controller consists of two parts which are the mounting base (MS-FEB2620-0)
and the controller cover (MS-FEC2620-0).)
Figure 89: FEU1610 FEU2610
Figure 90: FEU1620 FEU2620
IMPORTANT: Any FEU1620 or FEU2620 controller used for smoke control

must be locked in an enclosure to prevent unauthorized access.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the buttons on the face of the FEU1620 or

FEU2620 controller to override smoke control points.
Mounting
The mounting base may be mounted without the controller cover. If you mount the mounting base
without the controller cover, ensure that there is sufficient clearance to allow later mounting of the
controller cover.
Follow these guidelines when mounting all FEC controller models listed above:
• Ensure that the mounting surface can support the FEC controller and any user-supplied
enclosure.
• Mount the FEC controller in the proper orientation. See Figure 91.
• Mount the FEC controller on an even surface whenever possible.
• Use shims or washers to mount the unit securely on the mounting surface.
• Mount the FEC controller in areas free of corrosive vapors and observe the environmental
limitations listed in the Technical Specifications section.
• Do not mount the FEC controller on surfaces that are prone to vibration, such as duct work, or
in areas where electromagnetic emissions from other devices or wiring can interfere with
FEC controller communication.
• Allow sufficient space for cable and wire connections (minimum of 50 mm [2 inches] in each
direction).
• On panel or enclosure mount applications, observe the following guidelines:
• Do not install the FEC controller in an airtight enclosure.
• Mount the FEC controller so that the enclosure wall or the transformer does not obstruct
ventilation of or radiate heat into the FEC controller housing.
Mounting Orientation
+15V OUT 1
OCOM 1
HOT
COM
OCOM 1
OUT 1
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
OCOM 3
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
IN1
UNIVERSAL
OCOM 1
COM
HOT
OUT 1
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
OCOM 3
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
ICOM OUT 2
ON
1
SA BUS
FAULT
POWER
IN2 OCOM 2
ICOM OUT 3
2
OCOM 3
IN3
BINARY
ICOM
3
ET SY
ADDRESSØ = ALLOFF
POWER ET SY R
POWER R
FAULT
FAULT
SA BUS
SA BUS
ET SY
Wall Mount.cdr
OUT 4
OCOM 4
ADDRESS
SENSOR
OUT 5
OCOM 5
R
FC
FC + OUT 6
ON ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF O
ON ADDRESS Ø =ALL OFF O
– OCOM 6 N
SABUS
N
EOL
EOL
COM
DIN Rail.cdr
OUT 7 ADDRESS
ADDRESS SA
OCOM 7 UNIVERSAL BINARY SA BUS
UNIVERSAL BINARY SA BUS PWR
SHLD
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
COM
COM
PWR
+15V
SHLD
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
COM
COM
PWR
N
O
+15V
+
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN3
SA
SENSOR
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN3
+
SA
SENSOR
+
+
–
FC
– COM
COM
SHLD HOT
EOL
Figure 91: Orientation for Wall Mount (left) and DIN Rail (right) Installations
Common FEC Configuration Details

Use the following information links to configure all Smoke Control FEC models.
Determining the FC Bus Address

See Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 86 for detailed information.
Setting the FC Bus Address

See Setting a Device Address on page 87 for detailed information.
FC Bus End-of-Line Switch
See End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus on page 95 for detailed information.
Wiring
To wire all FEC controller models:
1. Terminate wiring per engineering drawings.
2. Wire Network Sensors and other devices to the SA Bus or RJ-45 modular jack for sensors. See
Figure 92 (FEC1610/FEC1620) and Figure 94 (FEC2610/2620).
3. Wire the FC Bus in a daisy chain to other devices on the FC Bus and the supervisory controller.
4. Wire the SA Bus in a daisy chain.
Note: The FEC controller should be at one end of the SA Bus daisy chain. If multiple Input/Output
Modules (IOMs) are used, set the End-of-Line (EOL) switch on the last IOM.
5. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate address (in the range of 4-127).
6. Add SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protector kits to all FC and SA Bus communication
terminal block connections. See MS/TP SA Bus Network Sensors on page 167 for details.
7. Add SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 transient protectors to all MS/TP I/O terminal connections. See
MOV Requirements for MS/TP I/O Terminals on page 94 for details.
8. Connect power to the FEC controller.
9. Download and commission the FEU1610/2610 controller. See the Commissioning section.
Binary 24 VAC
Configurable
Outputs Power Terminal
Outputs
OCOM 1
COM
HOT
OUT 1
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
OCOM 3
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
POWER ET SY R
FAULT
Status
LEDs SA BUS
FC Bus FC
Address ON ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF O
N
EOL
DIP EOL
Switch
ADDRESS
Switches
UNIVERSAL BINARY SA BUS
SHLD
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
COM
COM
PWR
+15V
3
IN1
IN2
IN3
SA
SENSOR +
+
–
FEC1610_cvr.cdr
Universal Binary
Inputs Inputs RJ-45 Modular Jack
for Sensor SA Bus FC Bus
Figure 92: FEU1610/1620 Wiring Interface
Terminal Type Terminal Connection Required MOV Protection
Universal Input +15V 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Input IN1 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Input ICOM1 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Binary Input IN3 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Binary Input ICOM3 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Binary Output OUT1 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Binary Output OCOM1 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Configurable Output OUT4 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Configurable Output OCOM4 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Note: the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 contains 10 individual MOVs.
Figure 93: MS-FEU-1610-0U and MS-FEU-2610-0U I/O MOV Placement
24 VAC
Binary Configurable Analog Power Terminal
Outputs Outputs Outputs
OCOM 1
OUT 1
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
OCOM 3
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 8
OCOM 8
OUT 9
OCOM 9
HOT
COM
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 7
OCOM 7
POWER
ET SY R
FAULT
Status
LEDs SA BUS FC Bus
Port
Device O
ON N
Address ADDRESS
EOL
DIP ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF
EOL
Switches UNIVERSAL BINARY SA BUS Switch
ICOM1
ICOM2
ICOM3
ICOM4
ICOM5
ICOM6
ICOM7
ICOM8
SHLD
COM
COM
+15V
+15V
+15V
15V
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
STAT
+
–
FEC2610_cvr.cdr
Universal Binary
Inputs SA Bus FC Bus
Inputs
RJ-45 Terminals Terminals
Modular Jack
for Sensor
Figure 94: FEU2610/2620 Wiring Interface
Analog Output OUT8 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Analog Output OCOM8 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Figure 95: MS-FEU-1620-0U and MS-FEU-2620-0U I/O MOV Placement
Table 32: FEUx610 and FEUx620 Field Controller Platform Wiring List (Part 1 of 2)
Terminal Block Terminal Function and Electrical Wiring Requirements
Labels Ratings/Requirements (See Table 33 on page 133)
Universal IN +15V Sources 15 VDC power for active devices Same as IN, 5
35 mA total current
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode A3, 5
Accepts a 0-10 VDC input signal
10 VDC Maximum Input Voltage
Internal 75k ohm Pulldown
Analog Input, Current Mode B3, 5
Accepts a 4-20 mA input signal
Internal 100 ohm load Impedance
Analog Input, Resistive Mode A3, 5
Accepts 0-600k ohm input signal
Internal 12 V, 15k ohm Pullup
RTD (1k Nickel [Johnson Controls], 1k
Platinum, A99B
Silicon Temperature Sensor)
Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC)
Sensor (10k Type L, 2.252k Type 2)
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained A3, 5
Mode
1 s minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50%
duty cycle)
ICOM n The input signal common for Universal IN Same as IN
terminals; isolated from all other terminal
commons
Binary IN IN n Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained A3, 5
Mode
0.01 second minimum pulse width (50 Hz
at 50% duty cycle)
Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode
0.01 second minimum pulse width (50 Hz
at 50% duty cycle)
ICOM n The signal common for all Binary IN
commons
Analog OUT OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode A3, 5
Note: (FEC2610 and Sources 0-10 VDC output voltage
FEC2620 only) External 1k ohm minimum load required
10 VDC maximum output voltage
10 mA maximum output current
Analog Output, Current Mode B3, 5
Sources 4-20 mA output current
External 300 ohm maximum load required
OCOM n The output signal common for Analog Same as OUT, 5
OUT terminals; isolated from all other
terminal commons
Table 32: FEUx610 and FEUx620 Field Controller Platform Wiring List (Part 2 of 2)
Terminal Block Terminal Function and Electrical Wiring Requirements
Labels Ratings/Requirements (See Table 33 on page 133)
Binary OUT OUT n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac C3, 5
(Jumper set to Connects OUT to OCOM when activated
External) 30 VAC maximum output voltage
0.5 A maximum output current
40 mA minimum load current
OCOM n The output signal common for Binary OUT
commons, including BO terminal
commons
Binary OUT OUT n Sources 24 VAC Power (Hot) C3, 5
(Jumper set to
OCOM n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac
Internal)
Connects OCOM to 24 VAC Power (Com)
when activated (low side switching)
30 VAC maximum output voltage
Configurable OUT OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode A3, 5
Sources 0-10 VDC
External 1k ohm minimum load required
Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac mode C3, 5
Connects OUT to OCOM when activated
OCOM n The output signal common; isolated from Same as OUT, 5
all other terminal commons
Sensor1,2 Sensor Provides SA Bus communication network 30.5 m (100 ft) max.length phone
RJ-12 6-position modular connector cord
SA Bus2,4 + Provides SA Bus communication network Daisy-chained

- 366 m (1,200 ft) max. length
COM 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the (18 to 24 AWG)
SA Bus [22 AWG Recommended]
FC Bus2,4 + Provides FC Bus communication network Daisy-chained

- 1,524 m (5,000 ft) max. length
COM 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection (18 to 24 AWG)
[22 AWG Recommended]
24~ Power Hot AC Supply Input - Nominal 24 VAC 16 AWG
COM The 24~ Power common; isolated from all
other terminal commons
1. The SA Bus and the Sensor Port are daisy-chained internally.

2. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4k. For more information,
refer to the MS/TP Field Bus on page 83 section in this document.
3. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 111 for wire length specifications.
4. Requires a SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protector kit for all MS/TP communication terminal connections. See
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations on page 90 and SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP
Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations on page 92 for wiring details.
5. Requires SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 transient protectors for all MS/TP I/O terminal connections.
See MOV Requirements for MS/TP I/O Terminals on page 94 for wiring details.
Use Table 33 for all FEC wiring.
Table 33: FEC Wire Gauge and Length Guidelines
Guideline Cable Maximum Assumptions
Size Length
(AWG) (Ft)
A 18 1500 100 mV maximum voltage drop at maximum current
20 975
22 600
24 350
B 18 750 100 mV maximum voltage drop at maximum current
20 450
22 300
24 200
C 40 mA 18 400 Load Current vs Wire Length
Load Length
20 250
450 ft (137.2 m)
22 150 18 AWG (1.5 mm2)
400 ft (121.9 m)
24 100
350 ft (106.7 m)
500 mA 18 75
Load 300 ft (91.4 m)
20 50 20 AWG (0.8 mm )
2
250 ft (76.2 m)
22 30
200 ft (61 m)
24 20 22 AWG (0.6 mm )
2
150 ft (45.7 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)
24 AWG (N/A)
50 ft (15.2 m)
0 ft (0 m)
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Load Current (mA)
Setup and Adjustments
Setting the Binary Output INT/EXT Jumpers

The Binary Output jumpers (OUT1 through OUT3) are located on the circuit board in the mounting base
near the binary outputs. These jumpers select whether the output provides internal power to the load
(INT) or requires external power (EXT). See Figure 96.
INT
Jumper
Jumper positioned
on top two pins
Binary OUT_Jumpers.cdr
EXT (Default)
Jumper positioned
on bottom two pins
Pins
Figure 96: Binary Output Jumper Positions
When set to the INT position, the FEC controller is the power source for the Binary Output and both sides
of the load can be wired directly to the OUTx and COMx terminals.
Setting the jumper to the EXT position isolates the Binary Outputs and power must come from one or
more external sources. Do not wire the load directly to the OUTx and COMx terminals. Wire one side of
the load to the source and the other side of the load to the OUTx terminal. Wire the other side of the
external power source to the COMx terminal.
Setting the Analog Input Load Resistor Enable/Disable

The Analog Input Resistor Enable/Disable jumpers (J10 through J15) are located on the circuit board in
the controller cover. These jumpers can permanently connect the internal 4-20 mA, 100 ohm load resistor
to the input terminals. There is one jumper for each of the Universal Inputs. See Figure 97.
Jumper ENABLE
Jumper positioned
on top two pins
Analog Input_Jumpers.cdr
Pins DISABLE (Default)

Jumper positioned
on bottom two pins
Figure 97: Analog Input Resistor Jumper Positions
Software configuration of the Universal Input normally selects the enabling or disabling of the analog
input load resistor. In cases when the analog input load resistor must be left connected even when power
is OFF to the controller, set this jumper to the ENABLE position.
This jumper must be in the DISABLE position for all Universal Input modes other than 4-20 mA.
Commissioning
Commission the FEUx610 or FEUx620 controller through the NAE passthrough and FC
communication bus and the Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) software.
Troubleshooting
Use Table 34 to troubleshoot the FEC controllers.
Table 34: Status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Name Color Normal Descriptions
Power Green On Steady Off Steady = No Power
On Steady = Power is supplied by Primary Voltage.
Fault Red Off Steady Blink - 2 Hz = Download or Startup in progress, not ready for
normal operation
Off Steady = No Faults
On Steady = Device Fault or no application loaded
FC Bus Green Blink - 2 Hz Blink - 2 Hz = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (auto baud in progress)
On Steady = Communication lost, waiting to join
communication ring
SA Bus Green Blink - 2 Hz Blink - 2 Hz = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (N/A - auto baud not
supported)
On Steady = Communication lost, waiting to join
communication ring
Specifications
Table 35: FEUx6x0-0U Technical Specifications
Product Code Number MS-FEU1610-0U Cooling Only
MS-FEU2610-0 U Cooling with Reheat
MS-FEU1620-0U Cooling Only with Display
MS-FEU2620-0U Cooling with Reheat with Display
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 60 Hz
Power Consumption 10 VA maximum plus all BO and Configurable Output loads
Ambient Operating 0 to 49°C (32 to 120°F) 10 to 93% RH non-condensing
Conditions
Terminations 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) spade lugs except communications and 24 VAC power, which are screw
terminals
Controller Addressing DIP switch set (4-127). Addresses 0 - 3, 128-255 are reserved.
Communications Bus BACnet MS/TP; 3-wire Field Controller Bus (FC Bus) between the Network Automation
Engine (NAE) and other devices. 4-wire
Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) between network sensors and other devices.1
Mounting Mounts to damper shaft using single set screw and to duct with single mounting screw.
Actuator Rating 4 N·m (35 lb·in) minimum shaft length = 44 mm (1-3/4 in.)
Compliance UL Listed and CSA Certified
UL 916 Energy Management Listing, CSA C22.2 No. 205, CFR47
FCC Part 15 Class A
CE Mark and C-Tick Directive
CE Directive 89/336/EEC (EN50081-1 Class B, EN50082-2)
Dimensions Width: 182 mm (7-3/16 in.)
Length: 182 mm (7-3/16 in.)
Height: 64 mm (2-1/2 in.)
Center of Output Hub to Center of Anti-rotation Slot: 160 mm (6-5/16 in.)
Plastic material: ABS _ polycarbonate UL94-5VB
Protection: IP20 (IEC 60529)
Weight 0.5 kg (1.1 lb) 0.68 kg (1.5 lb)
1.For more information, refer to the MS/TP Field Bus section in this document.
UL Label Placement
Figure 98: UL Label Placement for the MS-FEU1610-0U and MS-FEU2610-0U
Figure 99: UL Label Placement for the MS-FEU1620-0U and MS-FEU2620-0U
IOMx710 Field Equipment Controllers
The Input Output Modules (IOMs) IOM1710, IOM2710, IOM3710, and IOM4710 are members
of the Metasys® system Field Equipment Controller family. The IOM provides increased
capacity to larger Field Equipment Controller (FEC) applications when used on the Sensor
Actuator (SA) bus. The IOM can also be used on the Field Controller (FC) bus to connect
additional physical points to the system.
Figure 100: IOM1710 IOM2710
Figure 101: IOM3710 IOM4710
Mounting
Follow the guidelines below when mounting an IOM controller:
• Ensure that the mounting surface can support the IOM controller and any user-supplied
enclosure.
• Mount the IOM controller in the proper orientation. See Figure 102.
• Mount the IOM controller on an even surface whenever possible.
• Use shims or washers to mount the unit securely on the mounting surface.
• Mount the IOM controller in areas free of corrosive vapors and observe the environmental
limitations listed in the Technical Specifications section.
• Do not mount the IOM controller on surfaces that are prone to vibration, such as duct work, or in
areas where electromagnetic emissions from other devices or wiring can interfere with IOM
controller communication.
• Allow sufficient space for cable and wire connections (minimum of 2 inches in each direction).
On panel or enclosure mount applications, observe the guidelines below:
• Do not install the IOM controller in an airtight enclosure.
Mount the IOM controller so that the enclosure wall or the transformer does not obstruct ventilation of or
radiate heat into the IOM controller housing.
Wall Mount Applications

Use the holes in the two mounting clips for wall mount applications.
To mount the IOM on a wall or other vertical surface:
1. Ensure the two mounting clips are pulled outward and snapped firmly into the extended position.
2. Mark the location of the two wall mount holes using the supplied dimensions or hold the IOM up to
the wall as a template and mark the locations.
Note: Mount the IOM horizontally for proper air flow (Figure 102).
IOM1710 IOM2710 and IOM3710 IOM4710
OUT 1
COM
HOT
+15V
COM
OUT 1 NC
OUT 2 NC
OUT 3 NC
OUT 4 NC
OUT 2 NO
OUT 3 NO
OUT 4 NO
OCOM 3
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
OUT 8
OCOM 8
HOT
OCOM 2
OUT 1 NO
OCOM 1
IN1 OCOM 1
UNIVERSAL
OCOM 1
COM
HOT
OUT 1
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
OCOM 3
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
ICOM OUT 2
ON
1
SA BUS
FAULT
POWER
OCOM 2
IN2
ICOM OUT 3
2
OCOM 3
IN3
BINARY
ICOM
3
ADDRESSØ = ALLOFF
ET SY POWER ET SY
POWER R
ET SY R
POWER R
FAULT
FAULT FAULT
SA BUS
ET SY
Wall Mount.cdr
OUT 4
OCOM 4
ADDRESS
SENSOR
OUT 5
OCOM 5
R
FC + OUT 6
ON ADDRESS Ø =ALL OFF O
– OCOM 6
SABUS
N
ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF EOL ADDRESS EOL ADDRESS EOL COM OUT 7
O
N
ON
O
N ON ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF ADDRESS SA
OCOM 7
UNIVERSAL BINARY SA BUS PWR
SHLD
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
COM
COM
N
O
PWR
COM COM
+15V
+
UNIVERSAL
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN3
SA
BINARY INPUTS SENSOR
+
+
–
–
–
FC
ICOM 1
ICOM 2
ICOM 3
– COM
PWR
ICOM 4
COM COM
IN 1
ICOM 1
ICOM 3
ICOM 2
IN 3
IN 4
ICOM 4
+15V
IN 2
+15V
+5V
–
IN 1
IN 3
IN 2
PWR
IN 4
+5V
COM
SA
SHLD
+
+
–
–
SHLD HOT
EOL
Figure 102: Required Orientation for Wall Mount Applications
3. Drill holes in the wall at the locations marked in Step 2 and insert wall anchors (if necessary).
4. Position the IOM and insert the screws through the holes in the mounting clips, and carefully tighten
all the screws.
Common IOM Configuration Details

Use the following information links to configure all IOM models.



Commissioning the IOM
Commission all Smoke Control IOM models through the NAE passthrough and FC
Wiring
General Wiring Precautions
IMPORTANT: Do not connect 24 VAC supply power to the Network

Automation Engine (NAE) before finishing wiring and checking all wiring
connections. Short circuits or improperly connected wires may result in
IMPORTANT: User copper conductors only. Make all wiring in accordance

with local, national, and regional regulations. The IOM is a low-voltage
(<30 VAC) device. Do not exceed the IOM electrical ratings.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the IOM. Static electric
discharge can damage the IOM and void any warranties.
IOM Wire Gauge and Length Guidelines
Use Table 36 for all IOM wiring.
Table 36: IOM Wire Gauge and Length Guidelines
Guideline Cable Size (AWG) Maximum Assumptions
Length (Ft)
20 975
22 600
24 350
20 450
22 300
24 200
C 40 mA 18 400
Load
20 250 Load Current vs Wire Length
Length
22 150 450 ft (137.2 m)

18 AWG (1.5 mm )
2
400 ft (121.9 m)
24 100 350 ft (106.7 m)
500 mA 18 75 300 ft (91.4 m)

20 AWG (0.8 mm )
2
250 ft (76.2 m)
Load
20 50 200 ft (61 m)
2
22 AWG (0.6 mm )
150 ft (45.7 m)
22 30
100 ft (30.5 m)
24 20
Wiring length.cdr
24 AWG (N/A)
50 ft (15.2 m)
0 ft (0 m)
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Load Current (mA)
Wiring the IOM1710

To wire the IOM1710:
2. Wire Network Sensors and other devices to the SA Bus or Sensor socket.
3. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate hardware address (in the range of
4-127).
4. Add SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protector kits to all FC and SA Bus communication terminal
block connections. See MS/TP SA Bus Network Sensors on page 167 for details.
5. Add SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 transient protectors to all MS/TP I/O terminal connections.
6. Connect power to the IOM.
7. Download and commission the IOM.
108.0
(4.25)
COM
HOT
24 VAC
Mounting
Power Terminal
Clip
COM
HOT
SA/FC Bus
Port
ET SY
POWER R
Status
FAULT
LEDs
ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF EOL ADDRESS

O
ON
N
BINARY INPUTS
PWR
COM COM
ICOM 1
ICOM 3
IN 1
ICOM 2
IN 3
IN 4
ICOM 4
IN 2
+
–
Device Address
SH LD
+
Binary
–
DIP Switches
Inputs
EOL SA BUS
Mounting Switch FC BUS
Clip
Figure 103: IOM1710 Wiring Interface Showing Dimensions

(mm/in.), and Physical Features
Terminal Type Terminal ConnectionRequired MOV Protection

Relay Output OUT 1 NO 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Relay Output OCOM1 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Relay Output OUT 1 NC 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Output OUT3 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Output OCOM3 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Figure 104: MS-IOM1710-0U I/O MOV Placement
IOM1710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List
Table 37: IOM1710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List
Terminal Terminal Function and Electrical Ratings/Requirements Wiring Requirements
Block Labels (see Table 36 on
page 142)
Binary IN IN n Dry Contact Maintained Mode A4
0.01 s minimum pulse width (50 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
Internal 12 V, 15k ohm Pull-up
Pulse Counter Mode
ICOM n The signal common for all Binary IN terminals; isolated from
all other terminal commons
SA Bus1, 3 + Provides SA Bus communication network. Daisy-chained
- 366 m (1,200 ft) maximum
COM length
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the SA Bus. 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to
24 AWG)
(22 AWG Recommended)
FC Bus1, 2 + Provides FC Bus communication network. Daisy-chained
- 1,524 m (5,000 ft)
COM maximum length
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection. 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to
24 AWG)
24~ Power Hot AC Supply Input, Nominal 24 VAC 16 AWG
COM The 24~ Power common; isolated from all other terminal
commons
1. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4K. For more
information, see MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 111.
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations on page 90 for wiring details.
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations on page 92 for details.
Troubleshooting
Use Table 38 to troubleshoot the IOM1710 module.
Table 38: IOM1710 LED Indicators
Power Green On Steady On Steady = Power is Supplied by Primary Voltage.
Off = No Power
Fault Red Off Off Steady = No Faults
On Steady = Device Fault
Flicker = Download or startup in progress and not ready for normal operation
SA Bus/FC Bus Green Flicker Flicker = Normal Communication
Off Steady = Auto baud in progress (Not applicable for SA Bus)
On Steady = Communication lost
Wiring the IOM2710 and IOM3710
To wire the IOM2710 or IOM3710:
3. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate hardware address (in the
range of 4-127).
4. Connect power to the IOM.
5. Download and commission the IOM.
Figure 105: IOM2710 Wiring Interface Showing Dimensions (mm/in.), and Physical Features
Figure 106: MS-IOM2710-0U I/O MOV Placement
180.0
7.09
58.0
2.28
OC1
NO1
NC1
NO2
OC2
NC2
NO3
OC3
NC3
NO4
OC4
NC4
O5
OC5
O6
OC6
O7
OC7
O8
OC8
COM
HOT
47.9 47.9
90 1.88 1.88
3.5 Universal Outputs
Relay Outputs 24 VAC
OCOM 3
Power Terminal
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
OUT 8
OCOM 8
COM
OUT 2 NO
OUT 3 NO
OUT 4 NO
HOT
OUT 1 NC
OUT 2 NC
OUT 3 NC
OUT 4 NC
OCOM 2
OUT 1 NO
OCOM 1
Status LEDs
POWER
ET SY R
SA/FC Bus 127.5

FAULT
Port 5.02
EOL ADDRESS
O
N ON ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF
COM COM
UNIVERSAL
EOL Switch
+
–
ICOM 1
ICOM 2
ICOM 3
ICOM 4
+15V
+15V
+5V
IN 1
IN 3
IN 2
PWR
IN 4
+5V
SA
+
–
97.5 48
3.77 1.92
Device Address SA/FC Bus
DIP Switches Terminals
Universal Inputs
Mounting Clip
Figure 107: IOM3710 Wiring Interface Showing Dimensions (mm/in.), and Physical Features
Figure 108: MS-3710-0U I/O MOV Placement
IOM2710 and IOM3710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List
Table 39: IOM2710 and IOM3710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List (Part 1 of 2)
Block1 Labels (see Table 36 on page 142)
Universal IN +5V Sources 5 VDC power for active devices Same as IN 4
60 mA total current
+15V Sources 15 VDC power for active devices Same as IN 4
35 mA total current
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode A4
Internal 75k ohm Pull-down
Analog Input, Current Mode B4
Analog Input, Resistive Mode A4
Accepts 0-600K Ohm input signal
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode A4
1 sec minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
Binary Input, Dry Contact Pulse Counter Mode A4
1 sec minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
ICOM n The input signal common for Universal IN terminals; Same as IN 4
isolated from all other terminal commons
Universal OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode A4
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC output voltage
1K Ohm minimum load
Binary Output Mode B4
24 V AC/DC FET
30 V AC/DC maximum output voltage
40 mA minimum load current (hold current)
Analog Output, Current Mode B4
External 300 Ohm maximum load required
OCOM n The output signal common; isolated from all other Same as OUT 4
terminal commons, including UO terminal commons
Table 39: IOM2710 and IOM3710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List (Part 2 of 2)
Block1 Labels (see Table 36 on page 142)
Relay OUT NO n Normally Open Contact
Output Connects OCOM to OUT NO when activated
Control 240 VAC maximum voltage
1/3 Hp 125 VAC, 1/2 hp 250 VAC
OCOM n The relay signal common; isolated from other terminal
commons, including Relay Output terminal commons
OUT NC n Normally Closed Contact
Connects OCOM to OUT NC when activated
240 VAC maximum voltage
1/3 hp 125 VAC, 1/2 hp 250 VAC
SA Bus2,3 + Provides SA Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 366 m (1,200 ft) maximum length
COM 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to 24
AWG)
FC Bus,3 + Provides FC Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 1,524 m (5,000 ft) maximum
COM length
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to 24
AWG)
commons
1. The terminal block column displays all the points for the IOM3710 model.
2. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4K. For more information,
see MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 111.
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations on page 90 and SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring
for SA Bus Communication Terminations on page 92 for wiring details.
Troubleshooting
Use Table 40 to troubleshoot the IOM2710 and IOM3710 modules.
Table 40: IOM2710 and IOM3710 LED Status Indicators
Power Green On Steady On Steady = Power is Supplied by Primary Voltage
Off = No Power
Fault Red Off Off Steady = No Faults
Flicker = Download or startup in progress and not ready for normal
operation
SA Bus/FC Bus Green Flicker Flicker = Normal Communication
Off Steady = Auto baud in progress (Not applicable for SA Bus)
On Steady = Communication lost
Wiring the IOM4710
3. Wire the FC Bus in a daisy chain.
4. Wire the SA Bus in a daisy chain.
5. The IOM4710 module should be at one end of the SA Bus daisy chain. If multiple
Input/Output Modules (IOMs) are used, set the End-of-Line (EOL) switch on the last IOM.
6. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate hardware address (in the
range of 4-127). See Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 86.
7. Connect power to the IOM4710 module.
8. Download and commission the IOM4710 module.
Binary Configurable Analog

Outputs 24 VAC
Outputs Outputs
Power Terminal
OCOM 1
OUT 1
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
OCOM 3
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 8
OCOM 8
OUT 9
OCOM 9
COM
HOT
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 7
OCOM 7
POWER
ET SY R
Status FAULT
LEDs
SA/FC Bus
Port
Device
O
Address N
EOL
COM
ON ADDRESS
FC
15V
EOL
DIP Switch
+
ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF

-
Switches UNIVERSAL BINARY

PWR
COM
ICOM1
ICOM2
ICOM3
ICOM4
ICOM5
ICOM6
ICOM7
ICOM8
SA
+15V
+15V
+15V
SA
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
+
-
IOM4710-cvr.cdr
SA/FC Bus
Binary Teerminals
Universal Inputs
Inputs
Figure 109: IOM4710 Module Wiring Interface
Figure 110: MS-IOU4710-0U I/O MOV Placement
IOM4710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List
Table 41: IOM4710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List (Part 1 of 2)
page 142)
Universal IN +15V Sources 15 VDC power for active devices Same as IN 4
100 mA total current
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode A4
Analog Input, Current Mode B4
Analog Input, Resistive Mode A4
RTD (1k Nickel [Johnson Controls], 1k Platinum, A99B
Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) Sensor
(10k Type L, 2.252k Type 2)
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode A4
1 s minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
ICOM n The input signal common for Universal IN terminals; Same as IN 4
Binary IN IN n Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode A4
Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode
ICOM n The signal common for all Binary IN terminals; isolated
from all other terminal commons
Analog OUT OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode A4
Sources 0-10 VDC output voltage
Analog Output, Current Mode B4
External 300 ohm maximum load required
OCOM n The output signal common for Analog OUT terminals; Same as OUT 4
Binary OUT OUT n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac C4
(Jumper set Connects OUT to OCOM when activated
to External) 30 VAC maximum output voltage
OCOM n The output signal common for Binary OUT terminals;
isolated from all other terminal commons, including BO
terminal commons
Table 41: IOM4710 Field Controller Platform Wiring List (Part 2 of 2)
page 142)
Binary OUT OUT n Sources 24~ Power (Hot) C4
(Jumper set
to Internal)
Connects OCOM to 24~ Power (Com) when activated
Configurable OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode A4
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC
Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac Mode C4
OCOM n The output signal common; isolated from all other Same as OUT
terminal commons
Sensor1, Sensor Provides SA Bus communication network 30.5 m (100 ft) maximum
RJ-12 6-position modular connector length phone cord
SA Bus,2,3 + Provides SA Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 366 m (1,200 ft)
COM maximum length
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the SA Bus 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to
24 AWG)
FC Bus2, 3 + Provides FC Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 1,524 m (5,000 ft)
COM maximum length
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to
24 AWG)
commons

2. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4k.
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations on page 90 and
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations on page 92 for wiring details.
Troubleshooting
Use Table 42 to troubleshoot the IOM4710 module.
Table 42: IOM4710 Status LEDs
On Steady = Power is Supplied by Primary Voltage.
Fault Red Off Steady Blink - 2 Hz = Download or startup in progress, not ready for normal operation
SA/FC Bus Green Blink - 2 Hz Blink - 2 Hz = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (auto baud in progress, N/A for SA bus)
On Steady = Communication lost, waiting to join communication ring
IOMx710-0U Specifications
Table 43: IOMx710-0U Technical Specifications
Product Code Number MS-IOM1710-0U MS-IOM2710-0U MS-IOM3710-0U MS-IOU4710-0U
IOM - Cover and Triac
Mounting Base
Supply Voltage 24 VAC Nominal at 60 Hz
Power Consumption 0.6 A Max, 10 VA maximum plus all BO and Configurable Output loads
Ambient Operating 0 to 49°C (32 to 120°F); 10 to 93% RH noncondensing
Conditions
Terminations Screw terminals, 3-Position Screw Terminal Pluggable Blocks, 4-Position Screw Terminal
Pluggable Blocks
Controller Addressing DIP switch set (4-127). Addresses 0 - 3, 128-255 are reserved.
Communications Bus • BACnet MS/TP; 3-wire Field Controller Bus (FC Bus) between the Network Automation
Engine (NAE) and other devices.
• 4-wire Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) between network sensors and other devices.1
Mounting On flat surface with screws on three mounting clips or a single 35 mm DIN rail
Standards Compliance UL Listed and CSA Certified
FCC Part 15 Class A
CE Directive 89/336/EEC (EN50081-1, EN50082-2)
Dimensions 108 x 127 x 58 mm 180 x 127 x 58 mm 180 x 127 x 58 mm 180 x 127 x 58 mm
(Height x Width x (4-1/4 x 5 x 2-1/4 (7-1/16 x 5 x 2-1/4 in.) (7-1/16 x 5 x 2-1/4 in.) (7-1/16 x 5 x 2-1/4 in.)
Depth) in.)
Plastic material: ABS _ polycarbonate UL94 5VB
Protection: IP20 (IEC529)
Weight 0.31 kg (0.7 lb) 0.48 kg (1.1 lb) 0.55 kg (1.2 lb) 0.68 kg (1.5 lb)
1. For more information, refer to the MS/TP Field Bus section in this document.
UL Label Placement
Figure 111: UL Label Placement for the MS-IOM1710-0U and MS-IOM2710-0U
Figure 112: UL Label Placement for the MS-IOM3710-0U and MS-IOM4710-0U
VMA16x0 Field Equipment Controllers
The Variable Air Volume (VAV) Modular Assembly (VMA) 1600 Series consists of configurable digital
controllers that use the BACnet® Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) communications protocol. Both
the VMA1610 and VMA1620 have a pressure sensor and actuator in a prewired unit.
Figure 113: VMA1610 VMA1620
Mounting
To mount the VMA1610/VMA1620:
1. Place the VMA in the proper mounting position on the damper shaft so that the wiring connections
are easily accessible. Make sure the VMA base is parallel to the VAV box (perpendicular to the
damper shaft). If needed, use a spacer to offset tipping of the VMA caused by the shaft bushings.
IMPORTANT: When the air supply to the VAV box is below 10°C (50°F), make sure that any
condensation on the VAV box, particularly on the damper shaft, does not enter the electronics.
Mount the VMA vertically above the damper shaft to allow any shaft condensation to fall away
from the VMA controller. Additional measures may be required in some installations.
2. Secure the self-piercing No. 10 screw through the VMA mounting slot with a power screwdriver and
100 mm (4 inch) extension socket. Otherwise, use a punch to mark the position of the shoulder
washer, and then drill a hole into the VAV box using a 3.5 mm (9/64 in.) drill bit. Insert the mounting
screw, and tighten against the washer.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the screws, or the threads may strip. If mounting to the VAV
box, make sure the screws do not interfere with damper blade movement.
3. Locate the damper position using the typical marking on the end of the damper shaft (Figure 114).
d_shaft
Figure 114: Typical Damper End Shaft
4. Note the direction, Clockwise (CW) or Counterclockwise (CCW), required to close the
damper. Grasp the damper shaft firmly with pliers and either manually close the damper for
90° boxes or manually open for 45° or 60° boxes.
5. Push down and hold the Manual Override button (see Figure 115), and turn the VMA coupler
until it contacts the mechanical end-stop at either the fully closed (90° boxes) or fully open
(45° and 60° boxes) position.
6. If the damper for a 90° box closes CCW, rotate the coupler to the CCW mechanical limit. If
the damper for a 90° box closes CW, rotate the coupler to the CW mechanical limit. The open
end-stop is automatically set for 90° boxes.
7. For 45° and 60° boxes, hard stops must be provided at both fully closed and fully open
damper positions. By installing the VMA at the fully open position, the VMA provides the
open stop for 45° and 60° boxes. The closed damper seal provides the fully closed stop.
8. Tighten the square coupler bolt to the shaft using an 8 mm (5/16 in.) wrench or 10 mm (3/8
in.) 12-point socket. Tighten to 17 to 21 N·m (150 to 180 lb·in [14 lb·ft]).
9. Loop the pneumatic tubing to include a trap for condensation. Attach the tubing from the
VMA to the VAV box pickup. The HIGH (red) tubing is connected to the inlet or
high-pressure side and the clear tubing to the low side (see Figure 115).
10. Push the manual release button, and turn the actuator coupling manually to ensure that the
actuator can rotate from full closed to full open positions without binding.
11. Complete the mounting by rotating the damper to the full open position.
CAUTION: Risk of Property Damage.

! Rotate the damper to full open position before starting the air handler. Failure to rotate the
damper to the full-open position may result in damage to the Variable Air Volume (VAV)
box or ductwork when the air handler is started.
Common VMA Configuration Details

Use the following information links to configure all Smoke Control VMA models.



Commissioning the VMA

Commission all Smoke Control VMA models through the NAE passthrough and FC
Wiring
For more information on the rules of the MS/TP Communications Bus, refer to the MS/TP Field Bus
section in this document.
To wire the VMA:
2. Wire network sensors and other devices to the SA Bus or Sensor socket.
3. Wire the FC Bus in a daisy chain.
4. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate hardware address (4-127).
Discharge Air From
Air Handling Unit NC
DA-VP VMA
DA-T ZN-T
Return Air from WC-ADJ
H
Room C
FAN-C HTG-O
RETURN
SUPPLY
Pneumatic Tubing 1 2
FAN-C
5. Connect power to the VMA.
DA-T CLEAR=LOW RED=HIGH 35 IN-LB (4Nm) 60 SECONDS

ALL FIELD TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
NC
RTD NI +15 OLs
OUT 1 24V C
IN
OCOM 1 C NO
ICOM
UNIVERSAL
OUT 2
BINARY
OCOM 2
ADDRESS 0=OFF
OUT 3
OCOM 3
ZN-T
SENSOR
WC-ADJ
SA HTG-O
PWR PWR
OUT 4 IN
COM COM
- OCOM 4 C
SA BUS
–
+ 24V
+
OUT 5
FC
CONFIGURABLE
EOL OCOM 5
SHLD
COM
24
FC BUS
FROM LAST DEVICE MS/TP +
Figure 115: VMA1610/1620 Wiring

TO NEXT DEVICE MS/TP
vma1620_wiring
XFR
2
277 VAC
1
GROUND
TAG DESCRIPTION CABLE TYPE

BO OUT 1 SF-C SUPPLY FAN COMMAND 2/22
BO OUT 2
TAG DESCRIPTION CABLE TYPE BO OUT 3
UI IN 1 DA-T DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE 2/22 CO OUT 4 HTG-O HEATING OUTPUT 3/22
SA BUS DEVICE 1 ZN-T ZONE TEMPERATURE 4/22 CO OUT 5
161
Figure 116: MS-VMA1610-0U I/O MOV Placement

Figure 117: MS-VMA1620-0U I/O MOV Placement
Table 44: VMA Wiring List (Part 1 of 2)

Terminal Terminal Function and Electrical Ratings/Requirements Wiring
Block Labels Requirements
Universal IN +15V Sources 15 VDC power for active devices A3,5
35 mA total current
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode
Analog Input, Resistive Mode
RTD (1k Nickel [Johnson Controls], 1k Platinum, A99B
Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) Sensor (10k Type L,
2.252k Type 2)
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode
1 s minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
Internal 12 V, 15k Ohm Pullup
ICOM n The input signal common for Universal IN terminals; isolated
from all other terminal commons
Table 44: VMA Wiring List (Part 2 of 2)
Terminal Terminal Function and Electrical Ratings/Requirements Wiring
Block Labels Requirements
Binary OUT OUT n Sources 24~ Power (Hot) C3,5
Connects OCOM to 24~ Power (Com) when activated
Configurable OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode A3,5
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC
Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac Mode C3,5
OCOM n The output signal common; isolated from all other terminal Same as OUT5
commons
Sensor1,2 Sensor Provides SA Bus communication network 30.5 m (100 ft)
RJ-12 6-position modular connector maximum length
phone cord
SA Bus1,2,4 + Provides SA Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 366 m (1,200 ft)
COM maximum length
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the SA Bus 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2
(18 to 24 AWG)
[22 AWG
Recommended]
FC Bus2,4 + Provides FC Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 1,524 m (5,000 ft)
COM maximum length
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2
(18 to 24 AWG)
[22 AWG
Recommended]
commons

2. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4k. For more information,
refer to the MS/TP Field Bus section in this document.
3. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 111 for wire length specifications.
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations on page 90 and
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations on page 92 for wiring details.
VMA Wire Gauge and Length Guidelines
Use Table 45 for all VMA wiring.
Table 45: VMA Wire Gauge and Length Guidelines
Guideline Cable Maximu Assumptions
Size m Length
(AWG) (Ft)
20 975
22 600
24 350
20 450
22 300
24 200
C 40 mA 18 400 Load Current vs Wire Length
Load Length
20 250
450 ft (137.2 m)
22 150 18 AWG (1.5 mm2)
400 ft (121.9 m)
24 100
350 ft (106.7 m)
500 mA 18 75
Load 300 ft (91.4 m)
20 50 20 AWG (0.8 mm )
2
250 ft (76.2 m)
22 30
200 ft (61 m)
24 20 22 AWG (0.6 mm )
2
150 ft (45.7 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)
24 AWG (N/A)
50 ft (15.2 m)
0 ft (0 m)
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Load Current (mA)
Troubleshooting
Use Table 46 to troubleshoot the VMA controllers.
Table 46: Status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On Steady = Power is supplied by Primary Voltage.
Fault Red Off Steady Blink - 2 Hz = Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal
operation
On Steady = Device Fault or no application loaded
FC Bus Green Blink - 2 Hz Blink - 2 Hz = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (auto baud in progress)
SA Bus Green Blink - 2 Hz Blink - 2 Hz = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (N/A - auto baud not supported)
Specifications
Table 47: VMA16x0-0U Technical Specifications
Product Code Number MS-VMA1610-0U Cooling Only
MS-VMA1620-0U Cooling with Reheat
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 60 Hz
Power Consumption 10 VA maximum; Power delivered to devices connected to the binary outputs (for
example, valves, relays, and so on) is not included in this rating.
Ambient Operating 0 to 49°C (32 to 120°F) 10 to 93% RH noncondensing
Conditions
Terminations 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) spade lugs except communications and 24 VAC power, which are screw
terminals
Controller Addressing DIP switch set (4-127). Addresses 0 - 3, 128 - 255 are reserved.
Communications Bus • BACnet MS/TP; 3-wire Field Controller Bus (FC Bus) between the Network
Automation Engine (NAE) and other devices.
• 4-wire Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) between network sensors and other devices.
Mounting Mounts to damper shaft using single set screw and to duct with single mounting screw.
Actuator Rating 4 N·m (35 lb·in) minimum shaft length = 44 mm (1-3/4 in.)
Standards Compliance UL Listed and CSA Certified
FCC Part 15 Class A
CE Directive 89/336/EEC (EN50081-1 Class B, EN50082-2)
Dimensions Width: 182 mm (7-3/16 in.)
Length: 182 mm (7-3/16 in.)
Height: 64 mm (2-1/2 in.)
Center of Output Hub to Center of Anti-rotation Slot: 160 mm (6-5/16 in.)
Weight 0.86 kg (1.9 lb) 0.86 kg (1.9 lb)
UL Label Placement
UL Listing labels must be positioned as shown Figure 118.
Figure 118: UL Label Placement for the MS-VMA1610-0U and MS-VMA1620-0U
MS/TP SA Bus Network Sensors
The MS/TP NS Series Network Sensors are SA Bus electronic zone sensors designed to function
directly with Metasys® system BACnet® protocol FECs, IOMs, and the VMA 1600. They are
available in either temperature only or temperature and humidity models.
Selection Charts
Network Sensor Ordering Information — Temperature and Humidity Models
Product Code Size (mm), Vertical LCD Humidity Temperature Occupancy F/C Screw
Number Height x Wallbox-Mou Display Adjustment: Override Scale Terminals
Width nted (WB), or Setpoint (Set), or Toggle (ST), or
Surface-Mou Warmer/Cooler Dial Modular Jack
nted (SM) (W/C) (MJ)
NS-APA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes MJ
NS-APA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes ST
NS-APB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-APB7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-BPB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-BPB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-AHA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes MJ
NS-AHA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes ST
NS-AHB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-AHB7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-BHB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-BHB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes ST
Network Sensor Ordering Information — Temperature Only Models

Product Code Size Vertical LCD Temperature Occupancy F/C Scale Fan Screw Address VAV
Number (mm), Wallbox-M Display Adjustment: Override Toggle Control Terminals Switches Balancing
Height x ounted Setpoint (ST), or Feature
Width (WB), or (Set), or Modular
Surface-M Warmer/Coo Jack (MJ)
ounted ler Dial
(SM) (W/C)
NS-ATA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes MJ
NS-ATA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes ST
NS-ATB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-ATB7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST
NS-ATC7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-ATC7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST
NS-ATD7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes Yes MJ
NS-ATD7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes Yes ST
NS-ATN7001-0 80 x 80 SM MJ
NS-ATN7003-0 80 x 80 SM ST Yes
NS-ATP7001-0 80 x 80 SM W/C Yes MJ
NS-ATP7002-0 80 x 80 SM W/C Yes ST
NS-ATV7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 MJ Yes
NS-ATV7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 ST Yes
NS-BTB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-BTB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST
NS-BTN7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM MJ
NS-BTN7003-0 120 x 80 WB, SM ST Yes
NS-BTP7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM W/C Yes MJ
NS-BTP7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM W/C Yes ST
NS-BTV7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 MJ Yes
NS-BTV7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 ST Yes
1. In the VAV Balancing models, the Fan Control button is replaced by a light bulb button used in the VAV Balancing Process.
Specifications
NS Series Network Sensor
Sensor Type With Setpoint Adjustment Without Setpoint Adjustment
Supply Voltage 9.8 to 16.5 VDC; 15 VDC Nominal
Current Consumption 25 mA Maximum (Non-Transmitting) 13 mA Maximum (Non-Transmitting)
Terminations Modular Jack or Screw Terminal Block
Sensor Addressing NS-xTN7003-0 NA DIP Switch Set (200 to 203)
on the SA Bus Model
All Other Models Fixed Address of 199 Fixed Address of 199
Wire Size Modular Jack 26 AWG (0.4 mm Diameter) Recommended; Three Twisted Pair (6 conductors)
Models
Screw Terminal 18 to 22 AWG (1.0 to 0.6 mm Diameter); 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Recommended
Block Models
Communication Rate Auto-Detect: 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps
Mounting Surface-Mounted (80 x 80)
Surface-Mounted or Vertical Wallbox-Mounted (120 x 80)
Temperature Measurement Range 0.0°C/ 32.0°F to 40.0°C/104.0°F
Sensor Type Local Platinum Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD)
Resolution ±0.5C°/±0.5F° NA
Sensor Accuracy ±0.6C°/±1.0F°
Time Constant 10 Minutes Nominal at 10 fpm Airflow
Default Setpoint Adjustment Range 10.0°C/50.0°F to 30.0°C/86.0°F in 0.5° Increments ±3.0C°/±5.0F°
Ambient Conditions Operating 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F); 10 to 95% RH, Noncondensing; 29°C (85°F) Maximum Dew Point
Storage -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F); 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F); 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing
Compliance United States UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, Under UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, Under CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Industry Canada, ICES-003
European Union CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
EN61000-6-3 (2001) Generic Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry
EN61000-6-2 (2001) Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment
Australia and C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
New Zealand
Shipping Weight 0.09 kg (0.20 lb) for NS-Axx7xxx-0
0.11 kg (0.25 lb) for NS-Bxx7xxx-0
LONWORKS® Field Bus
Network Topologies
The physical routing of the communication channel defines the network topology. The channel
and transceiver types define the requirements and limitations of each wiring topology.
Some network segments such as the TP/FT-10 and TP/XF-1250 require termination for proper
data transmission performance. Free topology and bus network topology differ in their
termination requirements. The following sections describe the Bus topology, its terminator type,
and termination procedures.
Bus Topology
A bus topology is a physical routing of the communication channel that includes a distinct
beginning and end, each requiring termination. This type is also known as a daisy-chain topology.
Figure 119 shows examples of various Bus topology configurations for Smoke Control systems.
Figure 119: Bus Topology
Devices per Segment
Table 48: Maximum Number of Devices per LONWORKS Network Segment
Device Type Maximum Allowed
FTT-10 Nodes Only 64 (if repeaters are not used)
FTT-10 Nodes Only 128 (if repeaters are used)
Mixed FTT-10 and LPT-10 Nodes 1 ([FTT10 x 2] + LPT10) < 128
Terminators:
Bus Topology 2 bus type EOL terminators required (NXM-TERM-FTT)
Physical Layer Repeaters Maximum of 1 per segment
1. Each LPT10 channel segment (between repeaters) requires its own power supply. Other factors such as power
consumption of individual LPT10 devices may limit a segment to fewer devices.
LONWORKS Network Bus Topology Termination NXM-TERM-FTT-U

Table 49: LONWORKS Network Termination
Termination Requirements Johnson Controls Part No.
R1 = 105 Ohm, 1%, 1/8W NXM-TERM-FTT-U (FTT10 Bus topology)
C1 = 100µF, = 50V
C2 = 100µF, = 50V
Figure 120: NXM-TERM-FTT-U
Table 50: Guidelines for LONWORKS Network Bus Topology

Cable Type Maximum Segment Length with Maximum Segment Length with FTT10
FTT10 Devices Only1 and/or LPT10 Devices1
Belden® 85102 2700 m (8,850 ft) 2200 m (7,200 ft)
Belden 8471 2700 m (8,850 ft) 2200 m (7,200 ft)
Level IV 22 AWG 1400 m (4,600 ft) 1150 m (3,770 ft)
JY (St.) Y 2 x 2 x 0.8 900 m (2,950 ft) 750 m (2,460 ft)
1. For the bus topology, the maximum length stub cable is 3 m (10 ft), and the stub lengths must be calculated into the
overall segment length.
SMK-MOVKIT-LON Transient Protection
The LON Communication line must have a SMK-MOVKIT-LON MOV kit installed when the
conduit run between the enclosures does not remain in the same room.
When installing the transient protectors (MOV kits) care must be taken when installing a
protector close to other protectors. Use the information below to install the MOV kit:
• Before installing the protective device in the terminal block, twist it together with the field
lead and insert it into the terminal block as one wire.
• Twist the wire tightly around the transient protection device a minimum of two turns before
inserting it into the terminal block.
• When more than two wires are to be placed under a single terminal screw, the wires must be
soldered together with a single #18 AWG wire 6 inches in length having a minimum
insulation thickness of 1/64 inch. The exposed terminal must be stripped and then tinned or
crimped with a suitable lug that will fit securely under the terminal screw.
Figure 121 shows wire runs to LON equipment in cabinets in various rooms and the correct use of the
SMK-MOVKIT-LON to protect the LON devices from transients.
Figure 121: SMK-MOVKIT-LON Communication Wiring
SMK-MOVKIT-LON Requirements for LON Communication Bus Transient Protection
Figure 122 shows a SMK-MOVKIT-LON and its wiring when the communication wiring leaves
the same room and the LON Bus communication wiring terminates at the LON communication
terminal block.
Figure 122: SMK-MOVKIT-LON LON Communication Wiring Terminations
Figure 123 shows the SMK-MOVKIT-LON wiring when the communication wiring leaves the same
room and the LON Bus communication wires do not terminate at the LON terminal block.
Figure 123: SMK-MOVKIT-LON Wiring Terminations - Multiple LON Wires
SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 and SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Requirements for LON
I/O Terminals
With the exception of the LN-VAVC-0 and LN-VAVCF-0 LON controllers, all other LON
controller input terminals and output terminals must have an MOV from a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0
placed between earth ground and each Power terminal, I/O Common terminal, and I/O terminal
(Figure 124).
The LON field device’s I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 MOV kit installed when the
conduit run between the enclosures and a LON I/O field device does not remain in the same room.
Note: The SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 kit contains 10 MOVs.
SMK-MOVKIT-LON Transient Protection for LN-VAVC-0 and LN-VAVCF-0 LON

Controllers
All LN-VAVC-0 and LN-VAVCF-0 controllers requires a combination of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0
and a SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protectors to protect all input and output terminals as
shown in Figure 124.
Care must be taken when installing transient protectors (MOV kits) in close proximiy to other
protectors. Use the information below to install the MOV kit.
• Before installing the MOV kit to the LON I/O terminal block, twist it together with the field
lead and insert it in the terminal block as one wire.
• Twist the wire tightly around the transient protection device a minimum of two turns before
inserting it into the terminal block.
When more that two wires are to be placed under a single terminal screw, the wires must be
soldered together with a single 6 inch length of 18 AWG wire having a minimum insulation
thickness of 1/64 inch. The exposed solder connection must be covered with a UL recgonized
component heat shrink. The single wire end that will be inserted into the terminal must be stripped
and then tinned or crimped with a suitable lug that fits securely under the terminal screw. The
single wire end that will be attached to earth ground must be stripped and crimped with a suitable
lug that will fit securely under the grounding screw.
The left and upper right diagrams in Figure 124 show the LON controller I/O terminal block
SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 connections. In the bottom right diagram in Figure 124, notice that the
LN-VAVC-0U and LN-VAVCF-0U both require a SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP. Even though this is a LON
device, it requires the SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP.
Figure 124: SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 LON I/O Wiring and MOV Terminations
LN Series Programmable VAV Controllers
The VAV Application Free Programmable Controller operates as a stand-alone unit or as part of a
network system. It features 4 configurable universal inputs, 1 pressure differential input, 3 triac
outputs (digital or PWM), 1 analog output (0-10 Volt PWM or digital 0-12 Volt), 1 floating motor
control output, a flow sensor, 3 different flow sensor calibration settings (automatic with duct area
or K factor, nominal flow, two-point calibration) and an actuator.
Connectors for the inputs, outputs, power, and network wires are found on the right side of the
unit. The connectors are labeled and easily accessible.
Figure 125: LN-VAVC-0
Figure 126: LN-VAVCF-0
IMPORTANT: The standard 3-terminal LON communication connector is

replaced by a special UL Listed terminal block which allows for two-wires to be
placed under a single terminal. Do not use any other terminal block to connect
the LON communication trunk or you will void the UL Listing.
Hole for Damper Shaft Pressure Scale
Selection Jumper
Mechanical Stops
sl ort noC hc et si D
Connectors
Mounting
0 1 Kit
Connectors
High Pressure Low Pressure

Sensor Input Sensor Input
Figure 127: Component Layout
Selecting Differential Pressure Scales

Three differential pressure scales are available and are selected using the pressure scale jumpers. See
Figure 127 for the jumper location and Figure 128 for the correct setting.
Range A Range B Range C
0 - 0.5H2O 0 - 1H2O 0 - 2H2O
0 - 125Pa 0 - 250Pa 0 - 500Pa
Figure 128: Differential Pressure Scale Settings

Universal Input I4+ 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Input C 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Input 13+ 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Input I1+ 1 lead (+) of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP installed between Terminal and Common Earth Ground
Analog Output C 1 lead (-) of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP installed between Terminal and Common Earth Ground
Analog Output A01 1 lead (Ref) of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP installed between Terminal and Common Earth Ground
Digital Triac Output C 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Digital Triac Output DO3 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Figure 129: LN-VAVC-0U I/O MOV Placement
Universal Input MOTOR FEEDBACK 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Input 13+ 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Universal Input I1+ 1 lead (+) of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP installed between Terminal and Common Earth Ground
Analog Output C 1 lead (-) of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP installed between Terminal and Common Earth Ground
Analog Output A01 1 lead (Ref) of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP installed between Terminal and Common Earth Ground
Figure 130: LN-VAVCF-0U I/O MOV Placement
Wiring
Power Wiring
Figure 131: Power Connection
Wiring the Inputs (I1, I2, I3)
By default, the VAV controllers are shipped with every input configured as a 10 k Ohm thermistor, or
digital, input.To change the input type, remove the cover and move the jumpers as shown from
Figure 132 to Figure 137. Figure 137 shows an internally sourced 4 to 20 mA input. The power supply is
internal to the sensor and is not on the board.
Note: See SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 and SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Requirements for LON
I/O Terminals on page 175 for details on required SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 connections.
Figure 132: Selecting Analog 10 k Ohm or Digital Inputs
Figure 133: Potentiometer Input
Figure 134: 10 k Ohm or Digital Inputs
Figure 135: 0 to 5 VDC Analog Inputs
Figure 136: Externally Sourced 4 to 20 mA Inputs
Figure 137: Internally Sourced 4 to 20 mA Input
Wiring Powered Digital Outputs (DO1, DO2, DO3)
At time of shipping, all digital outputs are configured as unpowered output types.
The digital outputs can be configured as one of the two types described below:
The unpowered output type does not have any voltage on the output terminals when the output is active.
Voltage and current are supplied from outside the board.
The powered output type has 24 VAC on the output terminals when the output is active. Voltage and
current are supplied from the board.
Maximum current for all digital outputs whether powered or unpowered is 1 Ampere.
DO1 and DO2 are controlled by a single jumper and so, must be set identically. The DO3 output has its
own jumper and can be set independently of the other two outputs.
All digital outputs are controlled by triacs. As a result, measurements across outputs with a digital
voltmeter may be misleading.
I/O Terminals on page 175 for details on required SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 connections
Wiring Powered Digital Outputs

Powered digital outputs switch 24 VAC from the supply transformer.
Set the output type selection jumpers as shown in Figure 138.
Figure 138: Jumper Position for Powered Output Types
Wire the powered output terminal as shown in Figure 139.
Note: See SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 and SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Requirements
for LON I/O Terminals on page 175 for details on required SMOKE-MOVKIT-0
connections.
Figure 139: Powered Outputs
Wiring Unpowered Outputs

Set the output type selection jumpers as shown in Figure 140.
Figure 140: Unpowered Outputs
Wire the unpowered digital output terminal as shown in Figure 141. See SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 and
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Requirements for LON I/O Terminals on page 175 for
details on required SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 connections.
Figure 141: Unpowered Digital Outputs
Wiring Analog Outputs
When configured as digital type, the analog outputs can provide 60 mA of current for relay, or solid state
relay, operation. Table 51 describes the Analog Output characteristics.
I/O Terminals on page 175 for details on required SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 connections
Table 51: Analog Output Characteristics
Analog Output Characteristic
Voltage 0 to 10 VDC when configured as an analog output
0 to 12 VDC when configured as a digital output
Maximum Current 60 mA @ 12 VDC when configured as digital (200 Ohm load)
50 mA @ 10 VDC when configured as analog
Figure 142: Analog Output
Figure 143: Analog to Digital Output Using a Relay
Specifications
Table 52: LN-VAVC-0U and LN-VAVCF-0U Technical Specifications
Product(s) LN-VAVC-0U
LN-VAVCF-0U
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.2 Amp Maximum
Environmental Operating Temperature: 0°C to 49°C, 32°F to 120°F
Relative Humidity: 0 to 93% Noncondensing
General Processor: Neuron® 3150®; 8 bits, 10 MHz
Memory: Non-volatile Flash 64 K (APB application and configuration
properties)
Communication: LonTalk® Protocol
Media Channel: TP/FT-10; 78 kbps
Transceiver: Echelon® Free Topology Transceiver (FTT-10)
Battery (for clock only): Real-time Clock Chip
Enclosure:
Material: PVC, flammable class VO
Dimension: 4.88 x 8.9 x 2.48 inches (124 x 226 x 63 mm)
Weight: 1.84 lbs (0.835 kg)
Safety: CSA and UL Listed
Damper Motor Motor: LM24-Mus
Torque: 35 in·lb, 4N·m
Angle of Rotation: 95° adjustable
Fits shaft diameter: 8.5 mm to 18.2 mm; 5/16’’ to 3/4‘’
Power Supply from Controller
Inputs Number: 4 Universal
Digital: Dry Contact
Voltage: 0-10 VC, Accuracy ±0.5%
Current: 4-20 mA with 500 K Ohms external resistor, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Resistor: Thermistor Type 2 10 K ohms
Accuracy: ±0.5°C; ±0.9°F\
Resolution: 0.1°C; 0.18°F Range: -40°C to 150°C; -40°F to 302°F
Potentiometer 10 K ohms
Linear 2-point setpoint adjustment
Min/Max linear configuration
Configurable on several points
Input Resolution: 12 bits analog/digital converter
1 Differential pressure: Range 125-250-500 Pa (0.5-1-2’’ H20), Accuracy ±3%
full scale
Outputs Number: 4
3 Digital: Triac 24 VAC ±15%, 50/60 Hz, maximum charge 1.0 A, internal or
external supply
1 Tri-mode Analog:
0-10 VDC (linear), PWM or digital 0-12 VDC
60 mA maximum @ 12 VDC (60°C ; 140°F)
Maximum load 200 ohms
Auto reset fuse: 60 mA @ 60°C; 140°F, 100 mA @ 20°C ; 68°F
Analog Output Resolution: 8 bits digital/analog converter
UL Label Placement
Figure 144: UL Label Placement for the LN-VAVC-0U and LN-VAVCF-0U
NXP-FSC-01U Controller
The NXP-FSC-01U is a LONWORKS network Flexible System Controller. The NXP-FSC-01U,
with its NXP-CPU-01U 386 CPU board, works in conjunction with all LNS-based LONWORKS
network devices on an FTT-10 LONWORKS network.The NXP-FSC-01U supports 32 hardwired
I/O points via any combination of three different I/O boards. These I/O boards are discussed in the
following sections.
The NXP-CPU-01U CPU board is a computer and is the decision making component of the
NXP-FSC-01U. The NXP-CPU-01U CPU does not have the ability to gather information,
therefore I/O modules are used to gather information from the field. In turn, decisions the
NXP-FSC-01U makes are communicated to the I/O modules through the communication
interface bus on the NXP-CPU-01U CPU board.
On the NXP-CPU-01U CPU board, the decisions are made by the 386EX microcontroller and are
passed on to the Neuron. The Neuron contains the MIP (Microprocessor Interface Program) that
allows the information from the microcontroller to be passed on to other devices via the network.
This transfer of information is done through the LONWORKS Network.
Figure 145: NXP-FSC-01U Controller
NXP-CPU-01U CPU Board
Figure 146: NXP-CPU-01U CPU Board
See Figure 147 for the 24 VAC power connection to the NXP-CPU-01U CPU board.
Connecting 24 VAC Power to the NXP-CPU-01U CPU Board
To connect power to the NXP-CPU-01U CPU board (Figure 147):
1. Wire 24 VAC Hot to the Hot terminal of the NXP-CPU-01U CPU board.
2. Connect 24 VAC Neutral to the Neutral terminal of the NXP-CPU-01U CPU board.
Figure 147: 24 VAC to NXP-CPU-01U CPU Board Connections
Connecting I/O Boards to the NXP-CPU-386-01U CPU Board
The I/O modules are connected to the NXP-CPU-01U board through a polarized ribbon cable. The
NXP-CPU-01U board supports a total of 4 I/O modules. Four I/O modules can be connected through the
EXPANSION A port on the NXP-CPU-01U board.
Note: Do not connect any I/O modules to EXPANSION B.
The I/O modules can be placed in any order. The first I/O module is connected directly to the
NXP-CPU-01U through a 6 ft. or 3 ft. polarized ribbon cable. The remaining I/O modules are connected
via a short polarized ribbon cable. The last I/O board on EXPANSION A (4 maximum) contains no
ribbon cable connection on the connector labeled EXPANSION.
To connect the NXP-CPU-01U to any of the NXP-FSC-01U’s I/O modules:
1. Connect one end of the polarized ribbon cable to the connector labeled EXPANSION A on the
NXP-CPU-01U board.
2. Connect the other end of the polarized ribbon cable to the connector labeled CONTROLLER on the
first I/O module.
If there are more I/O modules to connect:
3. Connect one end of the short polarized ribbon cable to the connector labeled EXPANSION on the
I/O module.
4. Connect the other end of the short polarized ribbon cable to the connector labeled CONTROLLER
on the next I/O module.
Note: The last I/O module contains no ribbon cable on the connector labeled EXPANSION.
If I/O modules are snap-track mounted you must ground each I/O board to chassis ground using
spade lug J1 or J2, depending on the I/O module.
NXP-CPU-386-01U CPU Board to I/O Board Ribbon Cable Pinouts
Figure 148 shows the pinouts for the straight-through 20-pin ribbon cable that connects the
NXP-CPU-386-01U’s Expansion A port (J1) to the first FSC I/O board’s Controller port (JP3).
These pinouts are also the same for the short straight-through ribbon cable, included with each I/O
board, that connects each I/O board’s Expansion port (JP1) to the next I/O board’s Controller port
(JP3).
Even though the physical ribbon cable is a straight-through cable, the module select lines are
internally shifted to determine the physical order of each installed I/O board.
Figure 148: I/O Board Ribbon Cable Pinouts and Logic
Figure 149: I/O Board to NXP-CPU-01U Board Connections
I/O Board Addressing
For addressing purposes, the first board connected to the NXP-FSC-01U’s NXP-CPU-01U CPU
board’s EXPANSION A port is board 1. The first point on each I/O board is point 1.
Note: Do not connect any I/O boards to the EXPANSION B port.
For example, in Figure 150, the 8 DO module is the first board connected to EXPANSION A so it
is Board 1. The first point on that board is Point 1. Board 3 is also an 8 DO module and its last two
digital output points are shown. Their addresses are Board 3, Point 7 and Board 3, Point 8.
Figure 150: I/O Board Addressing
Troubleshooting
Table 53: FSC-01U Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Solution
No LEDs No AC Power Check LED 1 on NXP-CPU-01U CPU board. If
LED 1 is ON, use a volt meter across P1 to check
for 24 VAC coming from the transformer.
Loss of Communications 1. LON disconnected 1. Check LON connection on J3.
or Panel Down 2. Check for terminating resistors on the LON
2. Unterminated network connection (location of the resistors depends
on the topology being used.
3. If LED 7 is flashing, the CPU is running. If
LED 7 in not flashing, see below.
No Statuses from I/O 1. Ribbon cable from NXP-CPU-01U 1. Check the silk screen on the 8UI module to
Modules to I/O modules is not connected ensure that the jumper setting matches the
properly. field device.
2. I/O board are not connected in the 2. See NXP-8UI-01U (8 UI Board) on page 197
order in which they were setup in to ensure the correct wiring for the field
the LON configuration tool. device.
Erratic Communications Multiple Nodes with the Same Verify node assignment for each panel in the
Address network.
Service Pin Not Detected 1. LON Disconnected 1. Check LON connection on JP9.
at LON Configuration Tool 2. Unterminated 2. Check for terminating resistors on the LON
connection (location of the resistors depends
on the topology being used)
LED 5 On Local Trouble - The LED is On when Check the ribbon cable connection from the 386
an I/O module is in Trouble. It will CPU to the I/O modules.
flash, if an I/O point is in Trouble.
LED 6 On Remote Trouble - The LED is ON Check all remote panels.
when a remote module is in Trouble. It
will flash, if a remote point is in
Trouble.
LED 7 Not Flashing Panel is locked up. Press the reset button and make sure the panel
comes up. If the panel does not come up, then
insert JP5 and press the Reset button. This will
delete the panels’s data. When the panel comes
up remove JP5. Reconfigure the node and
update the CPL to the panel from the LON
Configuration Tool.
Specifications
Table 54: NXP-FSC-01U Technical Specifications
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, 60 Hz
Typical Consumption: 5 VA
Maximum Consumption: 10 VA Protection: 5 Ampere removable fuse
Environmental Operating Temperature: 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
Relative Humidity: 0 to 93% Non condensing
General Processor: Neuron® 3150®; 8 bits, 10 MHz
Memory: Non-volatile Flash 64 K (APB application and configuration
properties)
Communication: LonTalk® Protocol
Media Channel: TP/FT-10; 78 kbps
Transceiver: Echelon® Free Topology Transceiver (FTT-10)
Battery (for clock only): Real-time Clock Chip
Enclosure:
Material: PVC, flammable class VO
Dimension: 4.88 x 8.9 x 2.48 inches (124 x 226 x 63 mm)
Weight: 1.84 lbs (0.835 kg)
Safety: CSA and UL Listed
UL Label Placement
Figure 151: UL Label Placement for the NXP-FSC-01U
NXP-FSC-01U I/O Modules
NXP-FSC-01U I/O modules communicate with the NXP-FSC-01U’s 386 CPU board regarding
field information. A total of 4 I/O modules can be connected to the NXP-FSC-01U. A ribbon
cable connects the 386 CPU board to the first I/O module to and to other I/O modules. The
NXP-FSC-01U currently supports the use of 8 UI (Universal Input) modules, 4 DO (Digital
Output) /4 AO (Analog Output) modules, and 8 DO (Digital Output) modules.
NXP-8UI-01U (8 UI Board)
The 8 UI I/O module is a 4” x 6” circuit board that provides 8 universal inputs individually
configurable for thermistors, dry contacts, pulsed inputs 4-20 mA transducers, 0-10V
transmitters, or 0-5V transmitters. It is an optional I/O module for the NXP-FSC-01U.
Figure 152: 8 UI Board
Wiring
Power
Power (+24 VDC) is supplied to the 8 DO module through the 386 CPU. This is provided through
a ribbon cable and is located at the I/O module connector JP2.
Spade Lug Connection

The 8 UI module has one spade lug (J2) that is used to ground the module to chassis ground.
If the 8 UI module is snap-track mounted it must be grounded to chassis ground by using the
spade lug on J2. Use a short length of heavy gauge wire to attach to a suitable chassis ground.
Backplane mounted 8 UI modules do not require this connection.
Universal Input GND 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Figure 153: NXP-8UI-01U I/O MOV Placement
Universal Input Configuration

The 8 UI module allows a user to connect 8 various types of transducers and transmitters with varying
voltages to the I/O module. The Universal Inputs are jumper selectable to allow for the following inputs:
thermistors, dry contacts, pulsed inputs, 4-20mA transducers, 0-10V transmitters, or 0-5V transmitters.
Figure 154 shows the Universal Input configuration.
Figure 154: Universal Input Configuration
Universal Input Labeling
The Universal Inputs are labeled IN1 to IN8.
The Universal Inputs are labeled IN1-IN8 and are located on terminal blocks JP14 and JP15 on
the 8 UI module. The jumpers for the Universal Inputs are labeled JP6-JP13. Table 55 lists the
Universal Input number with its corresponding jumper block number:
Table 55: 8 UI Universal Inputs and Corresponding Jumper Numbers
Jumper Block Number Universal Input Number
JP6 IN8
JP7 IN7
JP8 IN6
JP9 IN5
JP10 IN4
JP11 IN3
JP12 IN2
JP13 IN1
Universal Input Jumper Blocks

The Universal Inputs are jumper selectable to allow for thermistors, dry contacts, pulsed inputs
(the dry contact jumper is used) 4-20mA transducers, 0-10V transmitters, or 0-5V transmitters.
Figure 155 is an example of one of the jumper blocks for the Universal Inputs.
Figure 155: 8 UI Jumpers for Input Selection
Thermistor Wiring
To wire a thermistor to the 8 UI module:
1. Select the correct jumper setting for a thermistor (TH).
2. Connect one lead of the thermistor to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on terminal block JP14 or JP15).
3. Connect the other lead to one of the GND terminals.
4. Ground the shield to chassis ground at ONE point. (It is recommended to ground at the controller.)
Note: Only a 10K Type II (CP Curve) thermistor may be used.
Since jumper block JP9 is used, you must use Universal Input 5. See Table 55.
Figure 156: 8 UI Thermistor Wiring
Dry Contact or Pulsed Input Wiring
To wire a thermistor to the 8 UI module:
1. Select the correct jumper setting for a thermistor (TH).
2. Connect one lead of the thermistor to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on terminal block JP14 or
JP15).
3. Connect the other lead to one of the GND terminals.
4. Ground the shield to chassis ground at ONE point. (It is recommended to ground at the
controller.)
Note: Only a 10K Type II (CP Curve) thermistor may be used.
Note: Since jumper block JP9 is used, you must use Universal Input 5. See Table 55.
connections.
Figure 157: 8 UI Wiring for Dry Contacts
4-20 Milliamp Transducer Wiring
There are 3 scenarios for wiring 4-20mA transducers to the 8 UI module. These wiring connections are
shown in the next three wiring examples.
Internal Loop Powered, 2-Wire 4-20mA Transducer

To wire an internal loop powered, 2-wire 4-20mA transducer to the 8 UI module:
1. Select the correct jumper setting for a 4-20mA transducer.
2. Connect the Signal Out lead from the 4-20mA transducer to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on terminal
block JP14 or JP15).
3. Connect the positive lead of the 4-20 milliampere transducer to the 24VDC terminal (+24V on
terminal block JP14 or JP15).
Note: Since jumper block JP6 is used, you must use Universal Input 8. SeeTable 55
Figure 158: 8 UI 4-20 Milliamp Transducer Wiring
External Loop Powered, 2-Wire 4-20mA Transducer
connections.
To wire an external loop powered, 2-wire 4-20 mA transducer to the 8 UI module:
2. Connect the Signal Out lead from the 4-20mA transducer to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on
3. Connect the positive lead of the 4-20mA transducer to the positive terminal on the UL®
Listed External Power Supply.
4. Connect the negative terminal of the UL® Listed External Power supply to one of the GND
terminals on terminal block JP14 or JP15.
IMPORTANT: If the power supply does not have floating ground, an isolation
transducer module must be used between the transducer and the controller input
to prevent the possibility of ground loops!
Figure 159: 8 UI External Loop Powered, 2-Wire 4-20mA Transducer
External Loop Powered 4-20mA Transducer
To wire an externally powered 4-20 mA transducer to the 8 UI module:
2. Connect the Signal Out lead from the 4-20mA transducer to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on terminal
3. Connect the negative lead of the 4-20mA transducer to one of the GND terminals on terminal block
JP14 or JP15.
4. Connect the positive supply voltage lead of the 4-20mA transducer to the positive terminal on the
UL® Listed External Power Supply.
5. Connect the negative supply voltage lead of the 4-20mA transducer to the negative terminal on the
IMPORTANT: If the power supply does not have floating ground, an isolation transducer module
must be used between the transducer and the controller input to prevent the possibility of ground loops!
Figure 160: 8 UI External Loop Powered 4-20mA Transducer
0-10V Transmitter Wiring
There are 2 scenarios for wiring 0-10V transmitters to the 8 UI module. These wiring connections
are shown in the next two wiring examples.
Internally Powered 0-10 Volt Transmitter

To wire an internally powered 0-10 volt transmitter to the 8 UI module:
1. Select the correct jumper setting for a 0-10V transmitter.
2. Connect the Signal Out lead from the 0-10V transmitter to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on
3. Connect the negative lead of the transmitter to one of the GND terminals on terminal block
JP14 or JP15.
4. Connect the positive lead of the 0-10V transmitter to the +24VDC terminal (+24V on terminal
connections.
Figure 161: 8 UI 0-10V Transmitter Wiring
Externally Powered 0-10V Transmitter
To wire an externally powered 0-10 volt transmitter to the 8 UI module:
2. Connect the Signal Out lead from the 0-10V transmitter to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on terminal
3. Connect the negative lead of the transmitter to one of the GND terminals on terminal block JP14 or
JP15.
4. Connect the positive supply voltage lead of the 0-10V transmitter to the positive terminal on the
5. Connect the negative supply voltage lead of the 0-10V transmitter to the negative terminal on the
IMPORTANT: If the power supply does not have floating ground, an isolation transducer module
Figure 162: 8 UI Externally Powered 0-10V Transmitter
0-5V Transmitter Wiring
There are 2 scenarios for wiring 0-5V transmitters to the 8 UI module. These wiring connections
are shown in the next two wiring examples.
Internally Powered 0-5V Transmitter

To wire an internally powered 0-5 volt transmitter to the 8 UI module:
2. Connect the Signal Out lead from the 0-10V transmitter to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on
3. Connect the negative lead of the transmitter to one of the GND terminals on terminal block
JP14 or JP15.
4. Connect the positive lead of the 0-10V transmitter to the +24VDC terminal (+24V on terminal
connections.
Figure 163: 8 UI 0-5V Transmitter
Externally Powered 0-5V Transmitter
To wire an externally powered 0-5 volt transmitter to the 8 UI module:
2. Connect the Signal Out lead from the 0-5V transmitter to an input terminal (IN1-IN8 on terminal
3. Connect the negative lead of the transmitter to one of the GND terminals on terminal block JP14 or
JP15.
4. Connect the positive supply voltage lead of the 0-5V transmitter to the positive terminal on the UL®
5. Connect the negative supply voltage lead of the 0-5V transmitter to the negative terminal on the UL®
IMPORTANT: If the power supply does not have a floating ground, an isolation transducer module
Figure 164: 8 UI Externally Powered 0-5V Transmitter
Troubleshooting
Table 56: 8 UI Module Troubleshooting
No LEDs No DC Power Check ribbon cable connections. If
the 8UI module is the only I/O
module, one end of the polarized
ribbon cable is connected to
EXPANSION A or B on the 386 CPU
board and the other end of the
ribbon cable is connected to the JP3
(labeled CONTROLLER) on the 8UI
module. If there is more than one I/O
module on the controller, one end of
the polarized ribbon cable is
connected to the expansion
connector labeled EXPANSION on
the I/O module, and the other end of
the ribbon cable is connected to the
expansion connector labeled
CONTROLLER on the I/O module.
Loss of Communications or No 1. Improper Board Orientation 1. Check board orientation. All I/O
Statuses from Board modules are placed in the tub
2. Microcontroller Locked Up with the CONTROLLER
expansion connector towards the
top of the tub and the
EXPANSION expansion
connector towards the bottom of
the tub.
2. Cycle power by disabling power
on the Controller expansion
connector (JP3). Leave the
ribbon cable disconnected for a
minimum of 5 seconds.
See Specifications on page 210 for
the LED table and more information.
Invalid or Incorrect Statuses on 1. Improper Jumper Setting 1. Check the silk screen on the 8UI
the Inputs module to ensure that the jumper
2. Improper Terminal Connections setting matches the field device.
2. See NXP-8UI-01U (8 UI Board)
on page 197 to ensure the
correct wiring for the field
device.
Specifications
Table 57: 8 UI Board Specifications
Power input +24VDC @ 300mA from 386 CPU board
+5VDC @ 10mA from 386 CPU board
Power Consumption <11.5W
Processor Microchip Technologies PIC16C62
Inputs (8) jumper selectable: JP6 thru JP13
• 0-5 VDC
• 0-10 VDC
• 4-20mA
• 10K Thermistor
• Dry Contacts:
Wetted with 5mA
Totalizer pulses @ 8 samples/second
Power to inputs 24VDC is available for powering input devices at 20mA per device maximum or 160mA
total maximum
Status LEDs • LED 1 = Heart Beat (Green): Indicates that the microcontroller is functioning
correctly. The LED flashes ON a half second and OFF a half second.
• LED 2 = Status (Red): Indicates that the CPU board is communicating with the 8 UI
module. The LED flashes ON every time a communication occurs.
• LED 4 = Power (Green): Indicates that power is being supplied through the ribbon
cable and converted to +5VDC on the board.
Dimensions 4 x 6 in (101.6 x 152.4 mm)
UL Label Placement
Figure 165: UL Label Placement for the NXP-8UI-01U
NXP-8DO-01U (8 DO Board)
The 8 DO I/O module is a 4” x 6” circuit board that provides 8 independently controllable relay
outputs. It is an optional I/O module for the NXP-FSC-01.
Figure 166: 8 DO Board
Wiring
Power
HOA Switch Settings

The 8 relay outputs have fully monitored HOA (HAND/OFF/AUTO) switches to allow you to:
• activate the relay (HAND)
• allow the CPU board to control the relay (AUTO)
• deactivate the relay (OFF).
Note: With power being supplied, the HOA switches function even if the microcontroller fails.
There are 8 HOA switches used for wiring the digital outputs. Table 58 shows the HOA
switch settings.
Table 58: 8 DO Module HOA Switch Settings
Digital Terminal HOA Switch
Output Block Number
Number Number
DO1 JP10 S8
DO2 JP9 S7
DO3 JP8 S6
DO4 JP7 S5
DO5 JP6 S4
DO6 JP5 S3
DO7 JP4 S2
DO8 JP3 S1

The 8 DO module has one spade lug (J1) that is used to ground the module to chassis ground.
If the 8 DO module is snap-track mounted it must be grounded to chassis ground by using the spade lug
on J1. Use a short length of heavy gauge wire to attach to a suitable chassis ground. Backplane mounted
8 DO modules do not require this connection.

Relay Output NC None Required
Relay Output C None Required
Relay Output 1 NO None Required
Figure 167: NXP-8DO-01U I/O MOV Placement
Digital Output Wiring
Maintained relays, momentary relays and floating devices (floating actuators) are 3 types of
digital outputs that can be wired to the 8 DO module. These wiring connections are shown in the
three wiring examples below.
Maintained Relay Wiring

Note: The rating for this output is 24VAC at 1.0 amps.
To wire a Maintained relay to the 8 DO module:
1. Determine if the device is normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).
2. Connect one lead from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
(on terminal blocks JP7-JP10).
3. Connect the other lead from the device to the Neutral lead of the UL® Listed External Power
Supply.
connections.
4. Connect the Hot lead of the UL® Listed External Power Supply to the Common terminal
(C on terminal blocks JP7-JP10).
Figure 168: 8 DO Maintained Relay Wiring
Momentary Relay Wiring
This example uses a GE® RR-7 Lighting Relay as the momentary relay.
To wire a Momentary relay to the 8 DO module:
2. Connect the Black wire (OFF) from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
3. Connect the Red wire (ON) from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
4. Connect the Blue wire (24VAC) from the device to the Neutral lead of the UL® Listed External
Power Supply.
5. Connect the Hot lead of the UL® Listed External Power Supply to the Common terminals
Note: The recommended pulse time is 1 second (minimum 1 second).
Figure 169: 8 DO Momentary Relay Wiring
Floating Device Wiring
To wire a Floating Actuator to the 8 DO module:
2. Connect the Increment lead from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
3. Connect the Decrement lead from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
4. Connect the Ground lead from the device to the Neutral lead of the UL® Listed External
Power Supply.
connections.
Figure 170: 8 DO Floating Devices Wiring
Troubleshooting
Table 59: 8 DO Module Troubleshooting
No LEDs No DC Power Check ribbon cable connections. If the 8 DO
module is the only I/O module, one end of the
polarized ribbon cable is connected to
EXPANSION A or B on the 386 CPU board and
the other end of the ribbon cable is connected
to the JP3 (labeled CONTROLLER) on the
8 DO module. If there is more than one I/O
module on the controller, one end of the
polarized ribbon cable is connected to the
expansion connector labeled EXPANSION on
the I/O module, and the other end of the ribbon
cable is connected to the expansion connector
labeled CONTROLLER on the I/O module.
Loss of Communications or No 1. Improper Board 1. Check board orientation. All I/O modules
Statuses from Board Orientation are placed in the tub with the
2. Microcontroller Locked Up CONTROLLER expansion connector
towards the top of the tub and the
EXPANSION expansion connector towards
the bottom of the tub.
2. Cycle power by disabling power on the
Controller expansion connector (JP3).
Leave the ribbon cable disconnected for a
See Specifications on page 217 for the LED
table and more information.
Point Commands Do Not Work HOA Switch in Wrong Position Check the HOA switch position. The HOA
switch must be in AUTO to be commanded
from the Network tool.
Output Not Functioning in HAND Bad 8 DO Module Send 8 DO module back or use spare output
mode. point if available
Digital outputs operating Wrong connection of Normal 1. Check the silk screen on the 8 DO module
backwards from field. Open or Normally Closed for to ensure that the jumper setting matches
Field Device. the field device.
2. See NXP-8DO-01U (8 DO Board) on page
211 to ensure the correct wiring for the field
device.
Specifications
Table 60: 8 DO Module Specifications
Power input +24VDC @ 300mA from 386 CPU board
+5VDC @ 10mA from 386 CPU board
Outputs (8) relay outputs: Form C, 24VAC@ 1.0A, UL Listed, HOA operation and LED
indicator
Relay ON time programmable with 100 mS resolution (+/- 10%) and 1,000 seconds
maximum.
Relay Output HOA S1 thru S8: Fully monitored Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) switches
Switches Hand: User control
Off: Deactivate relay output
Auto: FSC CPU board control
correctly. The LED flashes ON a half second and OFF a half second.
module. The LED flashes ON every time a communication occurs.
• LED 3 = HOA (Yellow): Indicates that one or more of the outputs is in a mode other
than AUTO.
• LED 4 = ON (Red): Indicates that Digital Output 8 is ON1
• LED 8 = ON (Red): Indicates that Digital Output4 is ON1
cable and converted to +5VDC on the board.
DO Settings DO Location DO Number (Setting)
Number
JP3 DO 8 (Normally Open or Normally Closed)
JP4 DO7 (Normally Open or Normally Closed)
Ambient Operating 32 to-120 °F (0 to 49 C°) at 10% to 93% non-condensing
Conditions
Dimensions 4 x 6 in (102 x 152 mm)
(4) corner mounting holes 0.156 in (4.0 mm)
1. Either commanded thru the LONWORKS network configuration tool or switched to HAND mode.
UL Label Placement
Figure 171: UL Label Placement for the NXP-8DO-01U
NXP-4DO4AO-01U (4 DO/4 AO Board)
The 4 DO/4 AO I/O module is a 4” x 6” circuit board that is optional I/O module for the
NXP-FSC-01.
The 4 DO/4 AO module provides 4 independently controllable relay outputs and 4 analog outputs.
The relay outputs have fully monitored HOA (HAND/OFF/AUTO) switches to allow the user the
ability to activate the relay (HAND), allow the CPU board to control the relay (AUTO), or
deactivate the relay (OFF). The analog outputs have HA (HAND/AUTO) switches to allow the
user the ability to adjust the voltage of the output from 0 to 10 volts (HAND), or allow the CPU
board to control the voltage of the output (AUTO).
Figure 172: 4 DO/4 AO Board
Wiring
Power
HOA Switch Settings

The 4 relay outputs have fully monitored HOA (HAND/OFF/AUTO) switches to allow you to:
• activate the relay (HAND)
• allow the CPU board to control the relay (AUTO)
• deactivate the relay (OFF).
The analog outputs are labeled AO1(+)(-) - AO4(+)(-) on terminal blocks JP3-JP6. The digital
outputs are labeled 1 NO C NC - 4 NO C NC on terminal blocks JP7-JP10.
The analog outputs have corresponding HA switches. Table 61 shows the analog output, their
corresponding terminal block number and HA switch number.
Table 61: 4 DO/4 AO Board HA Switch Settings
Analog Output Terminal Block HA Switch Number
Number Number
1 JP6 S8
2 JP5 S7
3 JP4 S6
4 JP3 S5
The digital outputs have corresponding HOA switches. Table 62 shows the digital inputs with their
corresponding terminal block number and HOA switch number.
Table 62: 4 DO/4 AO Board Digital Output HOA Switch Settings
Digital Output Terminal Block HOA Switch Number
Number Number
1 JP10 S4
2 JP9 S3
3 JP8 S2
4 JP7 S1

The 4 DO/4 AO module has one spade lug (J1) that is used to ground the module to chassis ground.
Note: If the 4 DO/4 AO module is snap-track mounted it must be grounded to chassis ground by using
the spade lug on J1. Use a short length of heavy gauge wire to attach to a suitable chassis ground.
Backplane mounted 4 DO/4 AO modules do not require this connection.
Analog Output AO1- 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Analog Output AO1+ 1 piece of a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0 installed between Terminal and Earth Ground
Figure 173: NXP-4DO4AO-01U I/O MOV Placement
Digital Output Wiring
Maintained relays, momentary relays and floating devices (floating actuators) are 3 types of
digital outputs that can be wired to the 4 DO/4 AO module. The wiring connections are shown in
the following examples:
Maintained Relay Wiring

To wire a Maintained relay to the 4 DO/4 AO module:
2. Connect one lead from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal (on terminal blocks
JP7-JP10).
3. Connect the other lead from the device to the Neutral lead of the UL® Listed External Power
Supply.
4. Connect the Hot lead of the UL® Listed External Power Supply to the Common terminal
(C on terminal blocks JP7-JP10). See Figure 174.
connections.
Figure 174: 4 DO/4 AO Maintained Relay Wiring
Momentary Relay Wiring
Note: The rating for this output is 24VAC at 0.5 amps. This example uses a GE RR-7 Lighting Relay as
the momentary relay.
To wire a Momentary relay to the 4 DO/4 AO module:
2. Connect the Black wire (OFF) from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
3. Connect the Red wire (ON) from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
4. Connect the Blue wire (24VAC) from the device to the Neutral lead of the UL® Listed External
Power Supply.
Figure 175: 4 DO/4 AO Momentary Relay Wiring
Floating Actuator Wiring
To wire a Floating actuator to the 4 DO/4 AO module:
2. Connect the Increment lead from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
3. Connect the Decrement lead from the device to the desired NO or NC terminal
4. Connect the Ground lead from the device to the Neutral lead of the UL® Listed External
Power Supply.
connections.
Figure 176: 4 DO/4 AO Floating Actuator Wiring
Analog Output Wiring
To wire an analog output to the 4 DO/4 AO module:
1. Connect the positive lead from the analog device to the desired + AO terminal
(AO1-AO4 on terminal blocks JP3-JP6).
2. Connect the negative lead from the analog device to the - AO terminal
(AO1-AO4 on terminal blocks JP3-JP6). See Figure 177.
Figure 177: 4 DO/4 AO Analog Output Wiring
Troubleshooting
Table 63: 4 DO/4 AO Module Troubleshooting
No LEDs No DC Power Check ribbon cable connections. If the
4 DO/4 AO module is the only I/O module, one
end of the polarized ribbon cable is connected
to EXPANSION A or B on the 386 CPU board
and the other end of the ribbon cable is
connected to the JP3 (labeled CONTROLLER)
on the 4 DO/4 AO module. If there is more than
one I/O module on the controller, one end of the
polarized ribbon cable is connected to the
expansion connector labeled EXPANSION on
the I/O module, and the other end of the ribbon
cable is connected to the expansion connector
labeled CONTROLLER on the I/O module.
Loss of Communications or No 1. Improper Board 1. Check board orientation. All I/O modules
Statuses from Board Orientation are placed in the tub with the
CONTROLLER expansion connector
2. Microcontroller Locked Up towards the top of the tub and the
EXPANSION expansion connector towards
the bottom of the tub.
2. Cycle power by disabling power on the
Controller expansion connector (JP3).
Leave the ribbon cable disconnected for a
See Specifications on page 226 for the LED
table and more information.
Point Commands Do Not Work HOA Switch in Wrong Position Check the HOA switch position. The HOA
switch must be in AUTO to be commanded
from the Network tool.
Output Not Functioning in HAND Bad 4DO/4AO Module Send 4DO/4AO module back or use spare
mode. output point if available
Digital outputs operating 1. Wrong connection of 1. Check the silk screen on the 4 DO/4 AOI
backwards from field. Normal Open or Normally module to ensure that the jumper setting
Closed for Field Device. matches the field device.
2. See NXP-4DO4AO-01U (4 DO/4 AO Board)
on page 219 to ensure the correct wiring for
the field device.
Specifications
Table 64: 4 DO/4 AO Module Specifications
Power input +24VDC @ 300mA from NXP-CPU-01U board
+5VDC @ 10mA from NXP-CPU-01U board
Digital Outputs (4) relay outputs: Form C, 24VAC@ 1.0A, UL Listed, HOA operation and LED indicator
Relay ON time programmable with 100 mS resolution (+/- 10%) and 1,000 seconds
maximum.
Relay Output HOA S1 thru S4: Fully monitored Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) switches
Switches Hand: User control
Off: Deactivate relay output
Auto: FSC CPU board control
Digital Output Jumpers (4) Digital Output jumpers:
JP7 = Digital Output 4 (N.O. or N.C)
Analog Outputs (4) Analog Outputs:
Resolution: 0-10 VDC@5mA 8 bit resolution
Response Time: 2 seconds (change form 10% to 90% of full scale)
H/A Operation: Uses on-board potentiometers - single-turn, thumbnail adjustment
Analog Output Jumpers (4) Analog Output jumpers:
JP3 = Analog Output 4 (+ or -)
Analog Output S5 thru S8: Fully monitored Hand/Auto switches
Hand/Auto (HA) Hand: User control
Switches Auto: FSC CPU board control
correctly. The LED flashes ON a half second and OFF a half second. Normally
Flashing
module. The LED flashes ON every time a communication occurs. Normally
Flashing.
• LED 4 = HOA (Yellow): Indicates that one or more of the outputs is in a mode other
than AUTO. Normally Off (When no HOA switches are set to Hand or Auto).
• LED 5 = ON (Red): Indicates that Digital Output 4 is ON1.
• LED 6 = ON (Red): Indicates that Digital Output 3 is ON1.
• LED 8 = ON (Red): Indicates that Digital Output1 is ON1
cable and converted to +5VDC on the board. Normally On.
Dimensions 4 x 6 in (10.16 x 15.24 cm)
1. Either commanded thru the LONWORKS network configuration tool or switched to HAND mode. Normally On when
the DO is On.
UL Label Placement
Figure 178: UL Label Placement for the NXP-4DO4AO-01U
i.LON 600 LONWORKS/IP Server Router (72603-U)

The i.LON 600 LONWORKS/IP Server (Figure 179) is an EIA-852 compliant device that allows
LonTalk-to-IP communication and provides reliable and secure access to devices.
Figure 179: iLON 600 LonTalk-to-IP Router
Figure 180 shows an example iLON 600 LonTalk-to-Router Connection Layout
Figure 180: Example iLON 600 LonTalk-to-Router Connection Layout
Specifications
Table 65: iLON600 LonTalk Router Specifications
Processor AMD Au1000 32-bit RISC
Channel Type TP/FT10
LonWorks Twisted Pair Screw Terminals
Connector
Ethernet Port 10/100 BaseT, auto-selecting, auto polarity
Ethernet Connector RJ-45
Console Interface EIA-232, 9600 baud (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit)
Console Connector DB-9
Operating Input Voltage +24V AC or DC, <15 Watts (Model 72603R)
Power Connector Screw Terminals
Controls (Switches) Reset and Service switches
Indicators (LEDs) Power On, Ethernet Link, Activity, 10/100 Mbps, LonWorks Tx/Rx, Connect
Neuron Chip Service Pin Service pin message controlled by console application or hardware service
Function switch
Operating Temperature 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 93% RH, Non-condensing
Enclosure 8TE DIN
EMC FCC Part 15 Class B and EN55022 Class B, EN55024, CISPER 22 Class B,
VCCI Class B
Agency Listings UL 60950, cUL, C22.2 No. 60950-00, TÜV EN60950, CE, C-Tick
UL Label Placement
Figure 181: 72603-iLON 600 Router
NXE-RPT-FTT-U LON Repeater
The NXE-RPT-FTT-U LON repeater serves two purposes:
1. Isolate Smoke Control LON equipment from Non-Smoke Control LON equipment.
2. Extend the physical length of a single LON bus.
Figure 182: NXW-REP-FTT-U Repeater
Wiring
Figure 183: NXE-REP-FTT-U Repeater Wiring
Specifications
Table 66: NXE-REP-FTT-U Specifications
Power 24 VAC
Network LONWORKS FTT10
Network Topology Bus or Free (jumper selectable)
UL Label Placement
Figure 184: NXE-REP-FTT-U UL Label Placement
NXE-FTT-FTT-U Router
The Johnson Controls NXE-FTT-FTT-U (Router- FT-10 to FT-10) (Echelon’s LPR10 model number
72603R) is a two-channel LONWORKS (ANSI/EIA709.1) router that interfaces between TP/FT10 and
TP/FT10 twisted-pair channels. It is used to manage network traffic, increase the total number of
LONWORKS devices, and increase the cabling length in a system. Figure 185 shows the NXE-FTT-FTT-U
router.
Figure 185: NXE-FTT-FTT-U LonTalk TP/FT10-to-TP/FT10 Router
Wiring
Figure 186 shows the NXE-FTT-FTT-U faceplate.
Figure 186: NXE-FTT-FTT Faceplate View
Figure 187 shows the NEX-FTT-FTT-U network wiring connections.
Figure 187: NXE-FTT-FTT-U Wiring Connections (cover removed)
Specifications
Table 67: NXE-FTT-FTT-U Specifications
Processor Two Neuron 3150 Chips, 10Mhz
Service Function Recessed service switch (wink) LED.
Transceiver Type TP/FT10 to TP/FT10
Input Power 24 VAC or DC @ 2VA, internally isolated power supply
Mounting Type 2 or 2D DIN base plate
Temperature 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C), operating and non-operating
Humidity 10 to 93% RH
EMI FCCA, CE Mark
Safety Agency UL 916
Dimensions 3.9 x 3.9 1.0 in (10 x 10 x 2.5 cm)
UL Label Placement
Figure 188: NXE-FTT-FTT-U UL Label Placement
Smoke Control System Software
SCT
The SCT is used in all phases of engineering, installation, and commissioning of NAEs, FC bus
devices, and LON devices that make up the Metasys smoke control system. The SCT is used
offline to create archive databases that are downloaded to a smoke control NAE. The Logic
Connector Tool (LCT), contained in the SCT, was used to create the standard smoke control
applications included on the Branch Purchase Package (BPP) CD.
The standard smoke control applications can be installed and executed on any smoke control
NAE. Use the standard smoke control applications as written, any sequence modification to the
LCT program must be pre-approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The SCT tool
must not be accessible to anyone other than designated qualified technicians who are responsible
for installing, commissioning, and maintaining the smoke control site configuration. Password
restriction in conjunction with SCT accessibility will prevent unauthorized editing of the smoke
control sequences.
LONWORKS Network Configuration Tool

Use a LONWORKS network configuration tool such as LonBuilder, MCL Tool, or LonMaker to
commission the LONWORKS network smoke control devices.
System Programming Guidelines for Smoke Control

When programming the system for smoke control applications, the system must conform to the
guidelines outlined below.
Follow these guidelines when defining systems and objects:
• Name all systems used for smoke control in a manner that makes identification obvious. For
example, the air handling unit serving the west wing on the third floor might be called
AHU3_W and the stairwell pressurization system might be called STR_PRES.
• Name all objects within a system used for smoke control in a manner that makes identification
obvious. For example, the outdoor air damper might be called "OSA_DMPR" and the mixed
air damper might be called "MXA_DMPR."
• Use engineering units that are appropriate to easily determine the current status of a device.
• Use the 24-character expanded ID attribute in an object definition window to provide
information that is pertinent to an object’s type and location and is easily understood in an
emergency situation.
Enclosures and Accessories
All enclosures must be of correct metal thickness for its size, mounted, and wired in accordance with the
UL 864 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, Ninth Edition specification.
Mount NAE55 controllers, switches, routers and all other equipment in the smoke control network in a
UL Listed enclosure. See the installation information packaged with each product. See Table 72 on
page 251 for enclosure and accessory part numbers and specifications.
Table 68: PAN-PWRSP-U Device Limitations
Device(s) Allowed to Use a Single PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply
FEU2610
FEU2620
FEU1610
FEU1620
IOU4710
IOM3710
IOM2710
IOM1710
FEU2610 and 1 IOM1710
FEU2620 and 1 IOM1710
IOU4710 and 1 IOM1710
IOM3710 and 1 IOM1710
IOM2710 and 1 IOM1710
Two IOM1710s
FEU2610 and Smoke Control Accesories (Total power not to exceed the PAN-PWRSP-U 96VA limit.)
FEU2620 and Smoke Control Accesories (Total power not to exceed the PAN-PWRSP-U 96VA limit.)
IOU4710 and Smoke Control Accesories (Total power not to exceed the PAN-PWRSP-U 96VA limit.)
IOM3710 and Smoke Control Accesories (Total power not to exceed the PAN-PWRSP-U 96VA limit.)
Note: Any other combination requires the use of a PAN-PWRSP-U and at least one PAN-96VAXFR-U.
PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply
The PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply is a UL® Listed and CSA Certified Class 2 120/24 VAC
power supply with a duplex outlet, and power switch. An overcurrent circuit breaker is provided
for each of the two 120 VAC outlets.
Figure 189: PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply
Wiring the PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply
Figure 190: PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply
PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply Connections
Main Power Terminal Connections

120 VAC supply power connects to a three-terminal terminal block mounted on top of the power supply.
To wire the PAN-PWRSP-U Main Power terminal, connect the 120 VAC supply wires to the respective
Hot (H), Neutral (N) and Ground (G) terminals of the Main Power Input block (Figure 190).
On/Off Switch
An On/Off rocker switch on the right side of the power supply controls 120 VAC at the secondary power
terminal block and 24 VAC out from the power supply. The two utility outlets are unswitched and always
remain Hot.
Switched 120 VAC Secondary Output
A switched 120 VAC source is available from the PAN-PWRSP’s Secondary Output terminal
block. This is used to power a PAN-96VAXFR-U power supply that is mounted in the same
enclosure as the PAN-PWRSP-U. A rocker switch on the right side of the PAN-PWRSP-U
controls the 120 VAC output.
To connect to the Switched Output:
1. Connect the Hot side of the PAN-96VAXFR-U to the Hot terminal of the PAN-PWRSP-U’s
Secondary Power terminal block.
2. Connect the Neutral wire of the PAN-96VAXFR-U to the Neutral terminal of the
PAN-PWRSP-U’s Secondary Power terminal block.
IMPORTANT: Be sure the Ground lug for the PAN-PWRSP-U and PAN-96VAXFR-U are both
securely mounted to the backplane.
Note: See Figure 193 on page 242 for wiring details.
Switched 24 VAC to Field - Wiring Connections

1. Connect the PAN-PWRSP-U’s Orange wire to the field device’s 24 VAC Hot terminal
connection.
2. Connect the PAN-PWRSP-U’s Brown wire to the field device’s 24 VAC COM (Neutral)
terminal connection.
Utility Plugs
Two factory-wired, unswitched 120 VAC utility plugs are part of the PAN-PWRSP-U power
supply. One plug is located on the front of the power supply and the other is located on the right
side. Connecting 120 VAC to the Main Power input terminal automatically powers the utility
plugs.
Specifications
Table 69: PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply Specifications
Category Description
Power 96 VA 120/24 VAC power assembly
Receptacle Two receptacles 120 VAC, 5A manual resettable thermal protection circuit breaker
Primary Voltage 120 VRMS
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC, 3.5A Max.
Transformer Insulation Class 130
Transformer Class Class 2
Operating Temperature 0 to 49° C (32 to 120° F)
Agency Listings UL® 1585
CSA C22.2 No. 66-1988
UL Label Placement
Figure 191: PAN-PWRSP-U UL Label Placement
PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply
The PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply is a UL® Listed and CSA Certified Class 2 120/24 VAC
power supply. It is used in conjunction with a PAN-PWRSP-U power supply when loads exceed
the PAN-PWRSP-U’s 96 VA limit.
Figure 192: PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply
Specifications
Table 70: PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply Specifications
Power 96 VA 120/24 VAC power assembly
Receptacle 4A secondary, manual resettable thermal protection circuit breaker
Primary Voltage 120 VRMS
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC, 3.5A Max.
Transformer Insulation Class 130
Transformer Class Class 2
Operating Temperature 0 to 49° C (32 to 120° F)
Agency Listings UL® 1585
CSA C22.2 No. 66-1988
The secondary output terminal of the PAN-PWRSP-U provides a switched 120 VAC to the
PAN-96VAXFR-U.
Figure 193: PAN-PWRSP-U to PAN-96VAXFR-U Wiring
UL Label Placement
Figure 194: PAN-PWRSP-U and PAN-96VAXFR-U UL Label Placement
Power Distribution Panel and Enclosure (PA0P00010FC0-U)
The PA0P00010FC0-U is a prewired, preassembled Standard Control Panel and enclosure that contains
four 96 VA 120/24 VAC class 2 transformers, each with 4 Amp manual reset secondary protection for
powering Variable Air Volume (VAV) box controllers. This predesigned solution saves both time and
money by not requiring individual transformers in every VAV box.
The PA0P00010FC0-U Control Panel is shipped complete, mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H steel
enclosure. In addition to the four 96VA transformers, the assembly also contains low voltage terminal
blocks and a 10 Amp circuit breaker that provides primary protection for all four transformers.
The PA0P00010FC0-U contains terminals that are prewired and prelabeled to match each transformer,
making installation, commissioning, and servicing quicker and easier.
Figure 195: PA0P00010FC0-U Assembly 24 VAC Power Distribution Control Panel
Maximum devices per each 96 VA low voltage power distribution trunk are as follows:
1. A single VMA1610 draws a maximum of 14 VA, which means you can have a maximum of 6
VMA1610s per 96 VA transformer.
2. A single VMA1620 draws a maximum of 14 VA. Adding relays, actuators, etc. adds another 6
VA which means you can have a maximum of 5 VMA1620s per 96 VA transformer.
3. A single LN-VAVC or LN-VAVCF draws a maximum of 10 VA, which means you can have a
maximum of 10 LN-VAVs per trunk.
The above recommendations are based on a system where every controller is not fully loaded at
all times.
Specifications
Table 71: PA0P00010FC0-U Specifications
Terminal Blocks Terminal Blocks: 1/4 in. (6 mm) Wire Slots
Wiring All Components are Prewired to Terminal Blocks
Wire Size Ground Wire: 14 AWG; Transformer Wires: 18 AWG
Enclosure Rating Type 1
Ambient Operating Condition 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)
10 to 93% RH
Transformers Four PAN-96VAXFR-U Transformers, Power, Panel Mount, 120 V
Primary, 24 V Secondary, 96 VA, Split Bobbin, 4 Amp Secondary
Circuit Breaker, 10 Amp Primary Circuit Breaker that provides
primary protection for all four transformers.
Enclosure Type 1 with keyed lock, 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D (406 mm W x
508 mm H x 168 mm D)
Agency Compliance Control Panel: UL 508A Rated (cULus); Enclosure: UL 50 Rated,
CSA Approved
UL Label Placement
Figure 196: PA0P00010FC0-U UL Device Label Placement
Figure 197: PA0P00010FC0-U UL Label Placement - Enclosure Door
Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control Panel

Control accessories that are smoke control listed, such as the Acromag NU-RPT101-0U repeater,
NXE-FTT-FTT-U router, NXE-RPT-FTT-U LON repeater, iLON600 72603-U router,
NU-MC101-0U and NU-MC102-0U media converters, etc. can be mounted in a smoke control
enclosure provided:
1. There is enough space to mount the devices.
2. The total power required by the smoke control devices and the control accessories does not
exceed the enclosure’s power supply transformer rating. A second transformer may be
required to satisfy total power requirements.
3. Addition of the control accessories does not cause the ambient temperature inside the
enclosure to exceed 120° F (49° C).
Non-Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control Panel

Control accessories that are non-smoke control listed, such as relays, pneumatics, etc. can NOT
be mounted in a smoke control enclosure. A separate enclosure must be mounted to install all
non-smoke control accessories in.
Ordering Smoke Control Enclosures
All UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition smoke control enclosures are ordered as custom enclosures. There are
three possible ways to order Smoke Control Enclosures:
1. Custom enclosures using UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition listed NAE55x0-1U, NAE45x0-1U,
NAE35x0-1U, FECx6x0-0U, IOMx710-0U, LN-PRGxA-0U, controllers are ordered through the
Johnson Controls, Control Panels website, Custom Panels section. Order form # 1634-a is used to
place a custom panel order.
• Be sure to check the Smoke Control checkbox in the Special Conditions section of this form.
• If the local authority requires that a Union label be affixed to the panel, then check the Union
Label Required checkbox.
2. Custom enclosures using the UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition listed NXP-FSC-01U are ordered from
Louisville Kentucky. Contact Tony Cozzens at the Louisville Kentucky branch at (502) 671-7351 to
place an order.
3. Custom enclosures using the UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition listed VMA-16x0-0U, LN-VAVC-0U, or
LN-VAVCF-0U controllers are ordered from Environmental Technologies, Inc. using the ETI
Selection Program. The ETI Selection Program and ordering instructions are available at the Johnson
Controls, Mechanical Systems website. See Figure 198 for ETI enclosure details.
• Be sure to select the Smoke Control Electronics Enclosure option when ordering a new VAV box
unit from ETI.
• For systems having a VAV box unit that was not manufactured by ETI, order only the Smoke
Control Electronics Enclosure from ETI. Install the enclosure on the non-ETI manufactured VAV
box unit to house the controller.
Figure 198: ETI VAV Smoke Control Electronics Enclosure
Enclosures Requiring a Union Label
Certain jurisdictions require that smoke control panels display a union label. Johnson Controls must
contract with an external union electrical shop to meet Union requirements. The process to meet these
requirements is:
1. The Johnson Controls Branch orders a Smoke Control Listed panel requiring a Union label.
2. Johnson Controls provides all Smoke Control Listed parts.
3. Every part of the smoke control panel, including the enclosure with manufacturer’s UL label, is
inspected and labeled in accordance with Johnson Control’s Smoke Control Listing.
4. All parts are factory mounted in an enclosure by Johnson Controls in accordance with the UL 864
Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, Ninth Edition specification.
5. Johnson Controls sends the preassembled panel to the union electrical shop.
6. The union electrical shop wires the panel in accordance with UL 864 Control Units and Accessories
for Fire Alarm Systems, Ninth Edition specification, applies the union label, and sends the completed
panel to the specified smoke control site.
Ordering and Revision Information

Table 72 shows ordering information and revision numbers (when applicable) for all UL 864 UUKL
Ninth Edition Smoke Control Parts.
General Smoke Control Ordering Requirements

All Smoke Control sites must abide by the following requirements:
1. You can not purchase a similar third-party device and install it in a UL Listed smoke control system.
Doing so voids the UL Smoke Control Listing. Third-party devices must be provided and labeled by
the “factory” as described in the UL Smoke Control Listing.
2. A minimum of one Asante Ethernet switch is required for each smoke control site.
3. A PNET1GB Ethernet transient protector is required at each end of all Ethernet communication
cables. The PNET1GB must have the strain-relief tie-wrap installed.
4. All 120VAC rackmount communication devices must be connected to a TrippLite Isobar 12 Ultra
rackmount surge suppressor.
5. All devices that have a 120 VAC power converter and are not mounted in an enclosure, must have the
power converter connected to a TrippLite Isobar 8 Ultra surge suppressor or a TrippLite Isobar 12
Ultra rackmount surge suppressor.
6. All devices mounted in enclosures, having a 120 VAC power converter must have the power
converter connected to a TrippLite Isobar 8 Ultra surge suppressor mounted in the same enclosure.
7. Acromag repeaters must be mounted in an enclosure and must have its 120 VAC power connected to
a TrippLite Isobar 8 Ultra surge suppressor mounted in the same enclosure.
Note: All parts below are UL 864 UUKL listed for Ninth Edition smoke control applications.
IMPORTANT: Only Johnson Controls products listed in Table 72 have been tested and Listed
by UL for use in a Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System. The
original manufacturer’s part number is only listed below as a reference for installation
instructions. Products ordered directly from the manufacturer have not been UL Listed and
labeled for smoke control applications.
Installation of a product that is not UL-Listed and labeled for this application prevents the
entire system from being UL Listed for smoke control!
Note: Previously listed UL 864 UUKL Eighth Edition part numbers are noted with an asterisk
(*) followed by their UL 864 UUKL Eighth Edition part number in parenthesis.
Table 72: UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control Part Ordering / Revision Information
Part Number Description Revision
Johnson Controls Supervisory Equipment
MS-NAE5510-1U NAE55 with MSTP, Supports two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485 port) trunks. 3.0.0
*(MS-NAE5510-0U) UL 864 UUKL listed for Ninth Edition smoke control applications.
MS-NAE4510-2U NAE45 with MSTP, Supports one BACnet MS/TP (RS-485 port) trunk. 3.0.0
UL 864 UUKL listed for Ninth Edition smoke control applications.
MS-NAE3510-2U NAE35 with MSTP, Supports one BACnet MS/TP (RS-485 port) trunk. 3.0.0
MS-NAE5520-1U NAE55 with LON, Supports one LONWORKS trunk and two FC trunks. 3.0.0
MS-NAE4520-2U NAE45 with LON, Supports one LONWORKS trunk and one FC trunk. 3.0.0
MS-NAE3520-2U NAE35 with LON, Supports one LONWORKS trunk and one FC trunk. 3.0.0
Johnson Controls FC Controllers
MS-FEU1610-0U 10-Point Field Equipment Controller with 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 CO, 24 3.0.0
VAC, and SA Bus, with Mounting Base, Single Pack
MS-FEU1620-0U 10-Point Field Equipment Controller with Display, 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 3.0.0
CO, 24 VAC, and SA Bus, with Mounting Base, Single Pack
MS-FEU2610-0U 17-Point Field Equipment Controller with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO and 4 CO, 3.0.0
24 VAC, and SA Bus with Mounting Base, Single Pack
MS-FEU2620-0U 17-Point Field Equipment Controller with Display, 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO 3.0.0
and 4 CO, 24 VAC, and SA Bus with Mounting Base, Single Pack
MS-IOU4710-0U 17-Point IOM with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, 4 CO, 24 VAC, FC Bus and SA 3.0.0
Bus with Mounting Base, Single Pack
MS-IOM3710-0U 12-Point IOM with 4 UI, 4 UO, 4 BO, FC Bus and SA Bus Support 3.0.0
MS-IOM2710-0U 6-Point IOM with 2 UI, 2 UO, 2 BO, FC Bus and SA Bus Support 3.0.0
MS-IOM1710-0U 4-Point IOM with 4 BI, FC Bus and SA Bus Support 3.0.0
MS-VMA1610-0U Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (Cooling Only), FC 3.0.0
Bus and SA Bus, Single Pack
MS-VMA1620-0U Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (with Reheat and Fan 3.0.0
Control), FC Bus and SA Bus, Single Pack
UL Listed MSTP Accessories
NU-RPT101-1U Acromag MSTP Repeater N/A
SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Acromag MSTP Repeater Kit - tranzorb transient suppressor for smoke N/A
*(SMOKE-TRNKIT-1) control applications
SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP MOV transient protection kit for MSTP equipment N/A
Note: Updated original part number only (previously
SMOKE-MOVKIT-MSTP); no component changes.
Non-UL Listed MSTP Accessories
NS-APA7001 SA Bus network sensor -SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface N/A
mount, LCD, 2% RH, setpoint adjustment, override, modular jack
NS-APA7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, screw terminal
NS-APB7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, modular jack
NS-APB7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, screw terminal
NS-BPB7001 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
2% RH, setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, modular jack
NS-BPB7002 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
2% RH, setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, screw terminal
NS-AHA7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, modular jack
NS-AHA7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, screw terminal
NS-AHB7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, modular jack
NS-AHB7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, screw terminal
NS-BHB7001 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
3% RH, setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, modular jack
NS-BHB7002 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
3% RH, setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, screw terminal
NS-ATA7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, override, modular jack
NS-ATA7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, override, screw terminal
NS-ATB7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, F/C toggle, override, modular jack
NS-ATB7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, F/C toggle, override, screw terminal
NS-ATC7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, fan control, override, modular jack
NS-ATC7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, fan control, override, screw terminal
NS-ATD7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, F/C toggle, fan control, override, modular jack
NS-ATD7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, F/C toggle, fan control, override, screw terminal
NS-ATN7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, modular jack N/A
NS-ATN7003 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, screw terminal, N/A
address switches
NS-ATP7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, warmer/cooler dial N/A
adjustment, override, modular jack
NS-ATP7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, warmer/cooler dial N/A
adjustment, override, screw terminal
NS-ATV7001 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, F/C toggle, override, modular jack, VAV balancing feature
Note: Fan control button is replaced by a light bulb button used in the
balancing process.
NS-ATV7002 SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint N/A
adjustment, F/C toggle, override, screw terminal, VAV balancing feature
balancing process.
NS-BTB7001 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
setpoint adjustment, override, F/C toggle, fan control, modular jack
NS-BTB7002 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle, fan control, override, screw terminal
NS-BTN7001 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, modular jack N/A
NS-BTN7003 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, screw N/A
terminal, address switches
NS-BTP7001 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, N/A
warmer/cooler dial adjustment, override, modular jack
NS-BTP7002 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, N/A
warmer/cooler dial adjustment, override, screw terminal
NS-BTV7001 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle, override, modular jack, VAV balancing
feature
balancing process.
NS-BTV7002 SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, N/A
setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle, override, screw terminal, VAV balancing
feature
balancing process.
Johnson Controls LON Equipment
LN-VAVC-0U LN-Series Programmable VAVC enclosure with LM-24M actuator, 2.34
pressure sensor, and 8 I/O (4 UI, 3 triac DO, 1 AO), with Logging and LNS
Plug-in
LN-VAVCF-0U LN-Series Programmable VAVC enclosure with LM-24M10 feed-back 2.34
actuator, pressure sensor, and 7 I/O (3 UI, 3 triac DO, 1 AO), with Logging
and LNS Plug-in
NXP-FSC-01U NXP-EN-RMH0013U Back Plane - includes NXP-CPU-01U, PAN-PWRSP See Note

Power Supply, NXM-CABLE-MGS04U 2' I/O Cable, NXP-8UI-01U 8UI for
FSC CPU, NXP-4DO4AO-01U 4DO/4AO for FSC CPU
Note: See individual components for revision level.
NXP-CPU-01U FSC CPU only SSM
4292-A03
NXP-8UI-01U 8UI I/O Board for NXP-FSC-01U SSM
4284-B01
NXP-4DO4AO-01U 4DO/4AO I/O Board for NXP-FSC-01U SSM
4286-B00
NXP-8DO-01U 8DO I/O Board for NXP-FSC-01U SSM
4287-B00
NXM-CABLE-MGS22U 6 ft. I/O Cable N/A
NXP-FSC-EXP1U FSC-01U Expansion Panel - includes NXP-EN-RMH0013U Backplane N/A
and NXM-CABLE-MGS22U 6 ft. I/O Cable
NXE-REP-FFT-U LON Repeater N/A
NXE-FTT-FTT-U Echelon - LPR10 - JCI Router N/A
NXP-EN28185-01U FSC Enclosure - 28 in. x 18.5 in. N/A
NXP-EN-RMH0013-U Full Backplane for NXP-EN28185-01U FSC Enclosure N/A
NXM-TERM-FTT-U LonWorks FTT10 Bus Terminator N/A
72603-U Echelon® - iLON 600 LON IP Router N/A
SMK-MOVKIT-LON MOV transient protection kit for LON equipment N/A
Note: Updated original part number only (previously
SMOKE-MOVKIT-LON); no component changes.
Johnson Controls Communication Equipment
NU-RJ45SW1-0U 10/100 Asante Ethernet Switch N/A
*(NU-RJ45SW1-0)
NU-MC101-0U 10mps Ethernet / Fiber Media Converter - Complete N/A
*(NU-MC101-0)
NU-MC102-0U 100mps Ethernet / Fiber Media Converter - Requires Chassis N/A
*(NU-MC102-0)
NU-CH101-0U Ethernet / Fiber Media Converter - Chassis N/A
*(NU-CH101-0)
464163 NetGear - FS105 5-Port Ethernet Switch N/A
Note: Order through Johnson Controls ITAS
Johnson Controls Enclosures // Transformers
Standard Hoffman Enclosures
PAN-ENH1620WDP 6.62 x 16 x 20 Encl w/door, latch, sub-panel N/A
PAN-ENH1620WD 6.62 x 16 x 20 Encl w/door, latch N/A
PAN-ENH2024WDP 6.62 x 20 x 24 Encl w/door, latch, sub-panel N/A
PAN-ENH2024WD 6.62 x 20 x 24 Encl w/door, latch N/A
PAN-ENH2424WDP 6.62 x 24 x 24 Encl w/door, lock, sub-panel N/A
PAN-ENH2424WD 6.62 x 24 x 24 Encl w/door, lock N/A
PAN-ENH2436WDP 6.62 x 24 x 36 Encl w/door, lock, sub-panel N/A
PAN-ENH2436WD 6.62 x 24 x 36 Encl w/door, lock N/A
Custom Hoffman Enclosures with Lift-Off Doors, Louvers, and Locks
PAN-ENC1620WDP1 6.62 x 16 x 20 Encl w/door, lock, sub-panel N/A
PAN-ENC1620WD1 6.62 x 16 x 20 Encl w/door, lock N/A
PAN-ENC2424WDF1 9.25 x 24 x 24 Encl w/cut-out door, lock N/A
PAN-ENC2436WDF1 9.25 x 24 x 36 Encl w/cut-out door, lock N/A

PAN-PWRSP-U 96 VA 120/24 VAC power assembly (transformer, receptacle, 5 Amp N/A
overcurrent circuit breaker)
PAN-96VAXFR-U Transformer, Power, Panel Mount, 120 V Primary, 24 V Secondary, 96 VA, N/A
Split Bobbin, 4 Amp Secondary Circuit Breaker,
PA0P00010FC0-U Power Distribution Panel and Enclosure - Contains four PAN-96VAXFR-U N/A
transformers, 120V,10 Amp Primary Circuit Breaker. For powering multiple
VAV/VMAs.
NXP-EN28185-01 5.00 x 28.5 x 18 Encl w/door, lock (FSC Enclosure only -no backplane) N/A
NXP-EN-RMH0013 13.50 x 27.25 Backplane for NXP-EN28185-01 Enclosure N/A
00-00051-01 ETI VAV Electonic Enclosure - 16” Enclosure, Electronic Control, 18GA N/A
00-00052-01 ETI VAV Electronic Enclosure - 16” Cover, Electronic Control, 18GA
3rd Party Equipment
*(ISOBAR8Ultra) CDW - 025070 - Tripp Lite® ISOBAR8Ultra Surge Suppressor N/A
www.cdw.com
*(ISOBAR12Ultra) CDW - 154600 - Tripp Lite® ISOBAR12Ultra Rackmount Surge N/A
www.cdw.com Suppressor
PNET1GB American Power Conversion (APC®) - PNET1GB Ethernet Surge N/A
*(PNET1) Suppressor
www.apc.com
www.adipanel.com ADI MSTP FSCS - Note: Custom product from Automation Displays, Inc. N/A
(ADI®)
www.echelon.com Echelon® - 72603 - iLON 600 LON IP Router N/A
1. All Hoffman custom enclosures have a factory installed grounding strap, supplied by Hoffman, connecting the
enclosure to the enclosure door.
Selection Charts
Table 73: Network Sensor Ordering Information — Temperature and Humidity Models
Product Code Size (mm), Vertical LCD Humidity Temperature Occupan F/C Screw
Number Height x Wallbox-M Display Adjustment: cy Scale Terminals
Width ounted Setpoint (Set) Override Toggle (ST), or
(WB), or or Modular
Surface-M Warmer/Cooler Jack (MJ)
ounted Dial (W/C)
(SM)
NS-APA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes MJ
NS-APA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes ST
NS-APB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-APB7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-BPB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-BPB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-AHA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes MJ
NS-AHA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes ST
NS-AHB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-AHB7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-BHB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-BHB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes ST
Table 74: Network Sensor Ordering Information — Temperature Only Models
Product Size Vertical LCD Temperat Occupancy F/C Fan Screw Address VAV
Code (mm), Wallbox Display ure Override Scale Control Terminal Switches Balanci
Number Height -Mounte Adjustme Toggle (ST), or ng
x Width d (WB), nt: Modular Feature
or Setpoint Jack
Surface- (Set), or (MJ)
Mounte Warmer/C
d (SM) ooler Dial
(W/C)
NS-ATA7001- 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes MJ N/A
0
NS-ATA7002- 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes ST N/A
0
NS-ATB7001 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ N/A
-0
NS-ATB7002 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST N/A
-0
NS-ATC7001 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ N/A
-0
NS-ATC7002 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST N/A
-0
NS-ATD7001 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes Yes MJ N/A
-0
NS-ATD7002 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes Yes ST N/A
-0
NS-ATN7001 80 x 80 SM MJ N/A
-0
NS-ATN7003 80 x 80 SM ST Yes N/A
-0
NS-ATP7001- 80 x 80 SM W/C Yes MJ N/A
0
NS-ATP7002- 80 x 80 SM W/C Yes ST N/A
0
NS-ATV7001- 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 MJ Yes
0
NS-ATV7002- 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 ST Yes
0
NS-BTB7001 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ N/A
-0
NS-BTB7002 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST N/A
-0
NS-BTN7001 120 x 80 WB, SM MJ N/A
-0
NS-BTN7003 120 x 80 WB, SM ST Yes N/A
-0
NS-BTP7001 120 x 80 WB, SM W/C Yes MJ N/A
-0
NS-BTP7002 120 x 80 WB, SM W/C Yes ST N/A
-0
NS-BTV7001 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 MJ Yes
-0
NS-BTV7002 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 ST Yes
-0
1. In the VAV Balancing models, the Fan Control button is replaced by a light bulb button used in the VAV Balancing Process.
Smoke Control UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Compliance Checklist
Overview
This section summarizes the most common requirements to configure the Metasys system extended
architecture to comply with Underwriters Laboratories®, Inc. (UL), UL UUKL 864 Ninth Edition
Smoke Control Listing. A UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control Compliance Survey form is followed by tables
listing the requirements for UL 864 UUKL Listing compliance.
The purpose of the UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control Compliance Survey is to provide a
record of those elements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 92A and UUKL that Johnson
Controls, Inc. does or does not provide.
UUKL is an identifier created by UL to identify those products Listed under UL 864 as part of a Smoke
Control system. Products covered by this listing are intended to be installed in conjunction with Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment to form a system for controlling the flow of smoke
in a building during a fire condition in accordance with NFPA Recommended Practice 92A.
It is important that we document the system elements that are being provided. The UL 864 UUKL Ninth
Edition Smoke Control Compliance Survey can be used to provide that documentation.
In the case where a project specification dictates compliance with the UUKL Listing, but contains
elements of the system design that conflict with the Listing or are omitted, the completed UL 864 UUKL
Ninth Edition Smoke Control Compliance Survey can be given to the designer and/or the AHJ to obtain
recognition and agreement on the extent of Listing compliance. This should occur prior to bid and/or
proposal.
Once agreement is reached with the AHJ, designer, and customer, the signed or initialed Smoke Control
Compliance Checklist must become a permanent part of the project file.
Related Documentation
If you are bidding, engineering, installing, or commissioning a Metasys system extended architecture
requiring UUKL 864 Ninth Edition Smoke Control Listing compliance, follow the guidelines,
requirements, and procedures listed in this document and in Table 1 Related Documentation.
UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control Compliance Survey
Date of Survey
Conducted By
Project
Location
Branch Office
Project Manager
Specifications
Building Codes
Contract
Applicable Building Codes and Standards
Local (Branch) Person Providing and Verifying Information

Initials Name
General UUKL Requirements
Table 75 lists general requirements for UL 864 UUKL Listing compliance. Mark Yes/No for compliance
and initial each item that was verified.
Table 75: General UUKL Requirements
Requirement Y/N Person
NA Verifying
Communication links between buildings are fiber-optic cable or
copper cable buried in a conduit separate from power wiring.
Each binary output object used for pressurization and exhaust
control is configured with positive feedback. The feedback input
monitors the associated controlled equipment status (for example,
both open and closed, on and off). For smoke control dampers,
there may be a pair of feedback binary inputs for two damper end
switches. Any mismatch of a command and status of the binary
output occurring longer than the allowed response time must create
a trouble light indication at the FSCS.
For fans there is positive indication of airflow.
Non UL-Listed control equipment must be isolated from the
UL-Listed network.
The Weekly Testing of Dedicated Stairwell Pressurization Fans
application is used on all dedicated smoke control systems.
Automatic smoke control sequences take precedence over HVAC
automatic and manual commands. Manual FSCS takes precedence
over all else.
Automatic activation of any smoke control sequence of operation
has priority over any non-smoke control manual commands and any
automatic environmental control strategy, when an auto smoke
control sequence is initiated. High and low temperature protection
devices and return and exhaust air-duct smoke detectors are
bypassed.
Response time for individual smoke control fans to reach
commanded state is no more than 60 seconds.
Response time for individual smoke control dampers to reach
commanded state is no more than 75 seconds.
Fire alarm system manual pull stations do not initiate automatic
smoke control sequences.
Smoke detectors are used to initiate a smoke control strategy only
as detailed in this document, Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Smoke
Control System Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011252).
All Application Specific Controls (ASCs) that monitor or control
smoke control equipment are UUKL Listed.
Electrical disconnects, overloads, duct static pressure limits, and
supply air duct smoke detectors are not overridden by manual or
automatic smoke control strategies.
FSCS UUKL Ninth Edition Requirements
Table 76 lists general requirements for UL 864 UUKL Listing compliance for FSCSs where
required. Mark Yes/No for compliance and initial each item that was verified.
Table 76: FSCS UUKL Requirements
NA Verifying
FSCS is UUKL Listed and provides manual control of the smoke control system, a UUKL
Listed annunciator panel is used as FSCS.
Custom annunciator FSCS is connected to a UUKL Listed Smoke Control NAE55.
FSCS provides positive indication of the operation of all smoke control equipment (for
example, both open and closed, on and off).
FSCS provides audible and visible trouble indication when any smoke control equipment
does not respond to automatic or manual commands.
FSCS simultaneously displays the status of all smoke control systems dampers, fans
FSCS has manual control over all smoke control systems.
FSCS can override (partially or in full) any operation in progress, including programmed
actions, non-smoke control manual overrides.
FSCS has highest priority over all smoke control systems.
A building diagram or equivalent at FSCS clearly indicates the type and location of all
smoke control equipment.
FSCS indicates the actual status (not the command status) of systems and equipment used
for smoke control. This includes the current position of each damper used in an active
smoke control sequence and the status of airflow status of every fan.
FSCS activates an audible signal if the operation proof sensor (binary feedback point)
failed to provide positive feedback that fan or damper reached its intended position.
Only one FSCS on Metasys system is used for smoke control applications unless approved
by the AHJ.
The FSCS manual activation or deactivation of any smoke control device has priority over
any automatic smoke or environmental sequence of operation.
Any return air duct smoke detectors in duct work of each HVAC fan system used for smoke
control exhaust or purge only reports an alarm condition to the FSCS or fire alarm
annunciator located at the FSCS and does not stop the fan.
All hardware supervision alarms, such as binary feedback alarms on fans and dampers, as
well as system alarm points turn on FSCS alarm horn.
Annunciation on the FSCS of change of state of smoke control equipment is no more than
10 seconds after reaching commanded state.
Smoke Control Wiring UUKL Requirements
Table 77 lists requirements for UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Listing compliance for Smoke
Control Wiring. Mark Yes/No for compliance and initial each item verified.
Table 77: Smoke Control Wiring Ninth Edition UUKL Requirements
NA Verifying
Communication links between buildings are fiber-optic cable or copper cable
buried in a conduit separate from power wiring.
If FC Bus or LON Bus signal circuits leave the room, transient protection is applied
as detailed in the Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control
Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011252).
Verify that a Tripp Lite® ISOBAR8ULTRA surge protector or a Tripp Lite
ISOBAR12ULTRA surge protector protects all 120 VAC power sources.
If fiber-optic cable is used, verify that it meets the requirements listed in the
Metasys System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System Technical
Bulletin (LIT-12011252).
If copper cable is used, verify that it meets the requirements listed in the Metasys
System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System Technical Bulletin
(LIT-12011252).
Verify that copper cable connected to media converters does not leave the room in
which the media converter is installed.
Verify that all RJ45 ethernet cables are protected from electrical surges through the
use of the American Power Conversion (APC) Protect Net (Model PNET1GB) surge
protector at each end of the RJ45 ethernet cable.
Verify that only the Smoke Control NAE model MS-NAE5510-1U, MS-NAE5520-1U,
MS-NAE4510-2U, NAE4520-2U, NAE3510-2U, NAE3520-2U are used for smoke
control in a UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition smoke control system.
If an RS-485-to-RS-485 repeater is used to isolate UUKL from non-UUKL devices on
an FC Bus, verify that it is installed in a UL-Listed enclosure. Refer to the Metasys
System UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke Control System Technical Bulletin
(LIT-12011252.). The transzorb must be a Johnson Controls Code No.
SMOKE-TRNKIT-1.
Controls Group Metasys® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

507 E. Michigan Street All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners.
Milwaukee, WI 53202 © 2008 Johnson Controls, Inc.
Published in U.S.A. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Metasys® System Ul® 864 Uukl Ninth Edition Smoke

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Metasys® System Ul® 864 Uukl Ninth Edition Smoke

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Metasys® System UL® 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Smoke

Smoke Control Software and Firmware Version Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Smoke Control Labeling - Factory and Production Date Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Smoke Control Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

FSCS (Fire Fighters Smoke Control Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Metasys® System Smoke Control System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Overview of HVAC Smoke Control System Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Dedicated Smoke Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Non-Dedicated Smoke Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Individual Floor Fan Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Fan Coil Units/Water Source Heat Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Smoke Control Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Fan Relay Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

UL 864 UUKL Ninth Edition Communication Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Automatic Fan Command Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Manual Fan Command Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Weekly Dedicated Fan Test Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Automatic Damper Command Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Weekly Dedicated Damper Test Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Fire Alarm Annunciation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Surge Protection Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Power Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Tripp Lite 8 Ultra Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Tripp Lite ISOBAR 12 Ultra Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

NU-RJ45SW1-0U 24 Port Ethernet Switch with RJ45 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

5 Port Ethernet Copper Switch with RJ45 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Smoke Control Network Automation Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Powering On the NAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Disconnecting Power from the NAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Smoke Control NAEs MS-NAE4510-2U and MS-NAE4520-2U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Wiring Considerations and Guidelines for Network Integrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

MS/TP Field Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

MS/TP Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication Terminations . . . . . . . . . 90

SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

MOV Requirements for MS/TP I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

End-of-Line Termination Switch Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

EOL Termination on the FC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

EOL Termination on the SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

SA Buses with Multiple Network Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

SA Bus Rules and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Wiring the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

General MS/TP Bus Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

FC Bus Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

FC Bus and SA Bus Screw Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Grounding the Cable Shield on MS/TP Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

SA Bus 6-Pin RJ-Style Modular Jack and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Commissioning Devices on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

NU-RPT101-0U RS-485-to-RS-485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

UL Label Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

MS/TP Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Common FEC Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Setup and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

UL Label Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

IOMx710 Field Equipment Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Common IOM Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Wiring the IOM4710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151